advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 416
Q1230UM_NT(En)01_cover.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 7, 2015 3:18 PM No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION. DIGITAL CAMERA User's Manual Printed in Thailand En_01 SB5A01(11) En 6MB27011-01 Nikon Manual Viewer 2 Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere. Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store and Google Play. En D7200 Model Name: N1406 To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all who use the product. The Menu Guide For more information on menu options and subjects such as how to connect the camera to a printer or television, download the camera Menu Guide from the Nikon website as described below. The Menu Guide is in pdf format and can be viewed using Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader. 1 On your computer, launch a web browser and open the Nikon manual download site at http://nikonimglib.com/manual/ 2 Navigate to the page for the desired product and download the manual. AFor Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 x–xiii). Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are used: D This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera. A This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the camera. 0 This icon marks references to other pages in this manual. Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold. Camera Settings The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used. i Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera. DK-23 rubber eyecup (0 70) BF-1B body cap (0 23, 319) D7200 camera (0 1) EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover (0 21, 22) MH-25a battery charger (comes with either an AC wall adapter or power cable of a type and shape that varies with the country or region of sale; 0 21) DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 70) Warranty UC-E17 USB cable User’s Manual (this guide) AN-DC1 BK strap (0 20) Memory cards are sold separately. Cameras purchased in Japan display menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other languages are not supported. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause. A ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D Software Use ViewNX-i to copy photos and movies to a computer for viewing. ViewNX-i is available for download from the following website: http://nikonimglib.com/nvnxi/ Use Capture NX-D to fine-tune pictures that have been copied to a computer and to convert NEF (RAW) images to other formats. Capture NX-D is available for download from: http://nikonimglib.com/ncnxd/ For the latest information on Nikon software, including system requirements, visit the websites listed on page xix. ii Table of Contents Package Contents ........................................................................ ii For Your Safety ............................................................................. x Notices......................................................................................... xiv Wireless ........................................................................................ xx Introduction 1 Getting to Know the Camera ..................................................... 1 The Multi Selector ...................................................................... 15 Camera Menus ............................................................................ 16 Using Camera Menus ........................................................................ 17 First Steps .................................................................................... 20 Basic Photography and Playback 30 “Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes) ........... 30 Basic Playback............................................................................. 39 Deleting Unwanted Photographs ................................................ 40 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 41 Special Effects 44 Options Available in Live View ...................................................... 46 P, S, A, and M Modes P: Programmed Auto ......................................................................... S: Shutter-Priority Auto ..................................................................... A: Aperture-Priority Auto.................................................................. M: Manual............................................................................................... Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ................................ 51 52 53 54 56 58 iii User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes 62 Saving User Settings .......................................................................... 62 Recalling User Settings...................................................................... 64 Resetting User Settings..................................................................... 65 Release Mode 66 Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 66 Frame Advance Rate .......................................................................... 67 Self-Timer Mode (E) .................................................................. 69 Mirror up Mode (MUP).................................................................. 71 Image Recording Options 73 Image Area................................................................................... 73 Image Quality and Size.............................................................. 77 Image Quality ....................................................................................... 77 Image Size.............................................................................................. 81 Using Two Memory Cards ......................................................... 82 Focus 83 Autofocus..................................................................................... 83 Autofocus Mode .................................................................................. 83 AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 86 Focus Lock ............................................................................................. 93 Manual Focus .............................................................................. 97 ISO Sensitivity 99 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.................................................. 102 iv Exposure 105 Metering .................................................................................... 105 Autoexposure Lock.................................................................. 107 Exposure Compensation ........................................................ 109 White Balance 111 Fine-Tuning White Balance .................................................... 114 Choosing a Color Temperature ............................................. 117 Preset Manual ........................................................................... 120 Viewfinder Photography................................................................ 120 Live View (Spot White Balance) ................................................... 124 Managing Presets ............................................................................. 127 Image Enhancement 130 Picture Controls........................................................................ 130 Selecting a Picture Control............................................................ 130 Modifying Picture Controls ........................................................... 132 Creating Custom Picture Controls.............................................. 135 Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows .................... 139 Active D-Lighting.............................................................................. 139 High Dynamic Range (HDR).......................................................... 141 Flash Photography 144 Using the Built-in Flash ........................................................... 144 Auto Pop-up Modes......................................................................... 144 Manual Pop-up Modes ................................................................... 146 Flash Compensation................................................................ 151 FV Lock ....................................................................................... 153 v Remote Control Photography 156 Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control.......................... 156 Wireless Remote Controllers ................................................. 160 WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers ............................................ 160 WR-R10/WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers...................... 160 Recording and Viewing Movies 161 Recording Movies.................................................................... 161 The Live View Display: Movies..................................................... 165 Maximum Length............................................................................. 166 Indices .................................................................................................. 167 Image Area.......................................................................................... 168 Taking Photos in Movie Mode..................................................... 169 Time-Lapse Photography ...................................................... 171 Viewing Movies........................................................................ 177 Editing Movies ......................................................................... 179 Trimming Movies ............................................................................. 179 Saving Selected Frames................................................................. 183 Other Shooting Options 185 The R Button (Viewfinder Photography)........................... 185 The i Button............................................................................. 189 The i-Button Menu (Viewfinder Photography) .................... 190 The i-Button Menu (Live View) .................................................. 191 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .................. 194 Bracketing................................................................................. 197 Multiple Exposure ................................................................... 211 Interval Timer Photography.................................................. 217 Non-CPU Lenses....................................................................... 224 Location Data ........................................................................... 227 vi More on Playback 229 Viewing Pictures....................................................................... 229 Full-Frame Playback......................................................................... 229 Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 231 Calendar Playback ............................................................................ 232 The i Button....................................................................................... 233 Photo Information ................................................................... 234 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................... 245 Deleting Photographs............................................................. 246 Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback.................... 246 The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 248 Wi-Fi 250 What Wi-Fi Can Do for You..................................................... 250 Accessing the Camera ............................................................. 251 Android and iOS: Connecting via SSID ..................................... 251 Android: Connecting via NFC....................................................... 254 Android: Other Wi-Fi Connection Options .............................. 256 Restoring Default Settings ............................................................ 256 Wireless Security ............................................................................... 257 Selecting Pictures for Upload ................................................ 263 Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload.................................. 263 Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload ..................................... 264 Selecting Pictures for Upload via NFC....................................... 264 Downloading Selected Pictures to the Smart Device ....... 265 vii Menu List 266 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ................................ 266 C The Photo Shooting Menu: Photo Shooting Options............ 268 1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ............ 273 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ....................... 276 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup .............................................. 289 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies...................... 294 O My Menu/m Recent Settings ............................................ 297 Retouch Menu Options .......................................................... 298 Trim ....................................................................................................... 298 Image Overlay ................................................................................... 299 NEF (RAW) Processing .................................................................... 302 Technical Notes 304 Compatible Lenses.................................................................. 304 Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ...................................... 311 The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS).............................. 311 Other Accessories .................................................................... 319 Caring for the Camera ............................................................ 320 Storage................................................................................................. 320 Cleaning............................................................................................... 320 Image Sensor Cleaning .................................................................. 321 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................... 328 viii Troubleshooting....................................................................... 333 Battery/Display .................................................................................. 333 Shooting (All Modes)....................................................................... 334 Shooting (P, S, A, M) ........................................................................... 337 Playback ............................................................................................... 338 Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) .............................................................. 340 Miscellaneous .................................................................................... 340 Error Messages.......................................................................... 341 Specifications............................................................................ 348 Lenses......................................................................................... 363 Approved Memory Cards ....................................................... 379 Memory Card Capacity............................................................ 380 Battery Life ................................................................................ 382 Index ........................................................................................... 384 ix For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them. The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol: This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all A warnings before using this Nikon product. ❚❚ WARNINGS x A Keep the sun out of the frame A Turn off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire. A Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment. A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control When operating the viewfinder diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder, care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally. malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter (available separately), unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid burns. Continued operation could result in injury. After removing the battery, take the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for inspection. A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas, as this could result in explosion or fire. A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard. Should a child swallow any part of this equipment, consult a physician immediately. A Do not disassemble A Observe caution when using the flash Touching the product’s internal parts could result in injury. In the event of malfunction, the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician. Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident, remove the battery and/or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon-authorized service center for inspection. A Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation. A Do not remain in contact with the camera, battery, or charger for extended periods while the devices are on or in use Parts of the device become hot. Leaving the device in direct contact with the skin for extended periods may result in low-temperature burns. A Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight Failure to observe this precaution could cause damage or fire. A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents. • Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns. • Using the flash close to the subject’s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. The flash should be no less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants. A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth. A Do not carry tripods with a lens or camera attached You could trip or accidentally strike others, resulting in injury. xi A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product: • Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. • Do not short or disassemble the battery. • Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery. If you are using an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged. • Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. • Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat. • Do not immerse in or expose to water. • Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery. Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins. • Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged. To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains. xii • When the battery is not in use, attach the terminal cover and store in a cool, dry place. • The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period. Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool. • Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery, such as discoloration or deformation. A Observe proper precautions when handling the charger • Keep dry. Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction due to fire or electric shock. • Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger. • Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth. Continued use could result in fire. • Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. • Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug or bend the power cable. Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame. Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed, take the power cable to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. • Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction due to fire or electric shock. • Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DCto-AC inverters. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire. A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks, use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations. A Follow the instructions of airline and hospital personnel xiii Notices • No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any this product may be reproduced, damages resulting from the use of transmitted, transcribed, stored in a this product. retrieval system, or translated into • While every effort has been made to any language in any form, by any ensure that the information in these means, without Nikon’s prior written manuals is accurate and complete, permission. we would appreciate it were you to • Nikon reserves the right to change bring any errors or omissions to the the specifications of the hardware attention of the Nikon and software described in these representative in your area (address manuals at any time and without provided separately). prior notice. Notice for Customers in Canada CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B Notices for Customers in Europe CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be collected separately. The following apply only to users in European countries: • This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste. • Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and prevent negative consequences for human health and the environment that might result from incorrect disposal. • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management. xiv This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately. The following apply only to users in European countries: • All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste. • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management. Notices for Customers in the U.S.A. Power Cable At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use, be at least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. D7200 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment. Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules. Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING: Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200 xv Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law. • Items prohibited by law from being copied • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions or reproduced The government has issued cautions Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private bonds, or local government bonds, companies (shares, bills, checks, gift even if such copies or reproductions certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or are stamped “Sample.” coupon tickets, except when a The copying or reproduction of minimum of necessary copies are to paper money, coins, or securities be provided for business use by a which are circulated in a foreign company. Also, do not copy or country is prohibited. reproduce passports issued by the Unless the prior permission of the government, licenses issued by public government has been obtained, the agencies and private groups, ID cards, copying or reproduction of unused and tickets, such as passes and meal postage stamps or post cards issued coupons. by the government is prohibited. • Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government copyrighted creative works such as and of certified documents books, music, paintings, woodcuts, stipulated by law is prohibited. prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws. xvi Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility. Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual (0 127). Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset network settings (0 256) and Network > Network settings options in the camera setup menu to delete any personal network information. For more information on the Network menu, see the documentation provided with the optional communication unit. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. xvii AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry. The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking. For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer. xviii D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY. A Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction. A Life-Long Learning As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites: • For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/ • For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/ • For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/ Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/ xix Wireless This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. The following countries are currently subject to embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria. The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions. Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless features of this product outside the country of purchase. Notices for Customers in the U. S. A. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. FCC WARNING The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Co-location This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200 xx Notices for Customers in Canada This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The D7200, which is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650 / IC ID: 772C-LBYR650) wireless LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website. xxi Notices for Customers in Europe Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D7200 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D7200.pdf Notice for Customers in Singapore Trade Name: Model: D7200 This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of certification labels not affixed to the device is given below. Complies with IDA Standards DA103423 Security Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not enabled: • Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information. • Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled. xxii Introduction Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual. The Camera Body Stereo microphone...163, 192, 273 Release mode dial ....................8, 66 Mode dial...........................................6 Mode dial lock release....................6 Eyelet for camera strap................ 20 Release mode dial lock release ........................................8, 66 7 Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit)......................................311, 319 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Z/Q button..................... 106, 289 Movie-record button ................. 163 Power switch ............................. 5, 24 Shutter-release button..........34, 35 E button.............................. 109, 194 Focal plane mark (E) ................. 98 Control panel....................................9 1 The Camera Body (Continued) Built-in flash...........................36, 144 Mirror.......................................71, 324 Meter coupling lever ................. 352 Lens mounting mark ....................23 M/Y button .............. 144, 146, 151 Infrared receiver (front)............. 157 D button................. 198, 203, 207 Cover for USB and external microphone connectors .............................................. 193, 319 9 HDMI connector cover .............. 319 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 Cover for accessory terminal and headphone connector ..................................... 160, 193, 227 11 Lens release button ......................29 12 AF-mode button..................... 84, 90 13 Focus-mode selector ............. 83, 97 14 Connector for external microphone....................... 193, 319 15 USB connector 16 HDMI connector ......................... 319 17 Accessory terminal............ 160, 227 18 Headphone connector.............. 193 A Close the Connector Cover Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer. 2 1 AF-assist illuminator ........... 34, 277 Self-timer lamp.............................. 69 Red-eye reduction lamp ..............................................145, 147 2 Sub-command dial.....................285 3 Pv button ............. 55, 167, 285, 288 4 Fn button....................... 76, 284, 288 5 N-Mark (NFC antenna)...............254 6 Battery-chamber cover .........22, 28 7 Battery-chamber cover latch..........................................22, 28 8 Contact cover for optional MB-D15 battery pack................................ 319 9 Power connector cover 10 CPU contacts 11 Lens mount ..............................23, 98 12 AF coupling 13 Tripod socket 14 Body cap ............................ ii, 23, 319 3 The Camera Body (Continued) Viewfinder eyepiece ..............10, 25 Rubber eyecup ...............................70 Diopter adjustment control ........25 A button ..............94, 107, 285, 288 O/Q button.................40, 246, 289 K button ...............................39, 229 Monitor ..........31, 39, 161, 185, 229 G button............................16, 266 L/U button .............17, 112, 115, 119, 121, 245 10 X/T button ...... 38, 78, 81, 243 11 W/S button ................... 100, 104, 194, 231, 232 12 i button............................... 189, 233 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 R (info) button ....................13, 185 Main command dial................... 285 Multi selector........................... 15, 17 J (OK) button ............... 15, 17, 284 Focus selector lock........................89 Memory card slot cover ........ 22, 28 Memory card access lamp .................................................35, 220 a button ........................ 12, 31, 161 Infrared receiver (rear) .............. 157 Live view selector.......... 12, 31, 161 Speaker ..................................... 5, 178 A LCD Illuminators Rotating the power switch toward D activates the standby timer and control panel backlight (LCD illuminator), allowing the display to be read in the dark. After the power switch is released, the illuminators will remain lit for a few seconds while the standby timer is active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward D again. Power switch D The Speaker Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices. 5 The Mode Dial The camera offers the modes listed below. To choose a mode, press the mode dial lock release and rotate the mode dial. Mode dial Mode dial lock release e, f, g, and h modes: • e —Programmed auto (0 52) • f—Shutter-priority auto (0 53) • g—Aperture-priority auto (0 54) • h—Manual (0 56) Auto modes: • i Auto (0 30) • j Auto (flash off) (0 30) Scene modes (0 41) j and k modes (0 62) Special effects modes (0 44) 6 A Non-CPU Lenses Non-CPU (0 305) lenses can be used only in modes A and M. Selecting another mode when a non-CPU lens is attached disables the shutter release. 7 The Release-Mode Dial To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting (0 66). Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial 1 1 S Single frame................................66 2 T Continuous low speed ...........66 3 U Continuous high speed .........66 8 2 3 4 5 6 4 J Quiet shutter-release ...............66 5 E Self-timer............................. 66, 69 6 V Mirror up.......................... 66, 71 The Control Panel The control panel shows a variety of camera settings when the camera is on. The items shown here appear the first time the camera is turned on; information on other settings can be found in the relevant sections of this manual. 1 2 3 9 8 4 5 7 6 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56 Battery indicator ........................... 26 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56 Memory card indicator (Slot 1) ......................................27, 82 5 Memory card indicator (Slot 2) ......................................27, 82 1 2 3 4 6 Number of exposures remaining...................................... 27 7 ISO sensitivity ................................ 99 8 Metering ....................................... 105 9 ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 99 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...................................... 103 A Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining will be displayed (some memory cards may in rare cases only display this information when the camera is on). Control panel 9 The Viewfinder 5 6 7 1 2 8 9 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 23 24 15 16 17 18 19 20 25 1 Special effects mode indicator .........................................44 2 Monochrome indicator .......44, 130 3 AF area brackets......................25, 33 4 “No memory card” indicator.......29 5 1.3× DX crop ............................73, 74 6 Framing grid (displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d7, Viewfinder grid display) ... 280 10 26 27 28 29 21 22 30 7 Focus points.................... 34, 89, 277 8 1.3× DX crop indicator .......... 73, 74 9 Roll indicator (portrait orientation) * 10 Roll indicator (landscape orientation) * 11 Focus indicator................. 34, 93, 98 12 Autoexposure (AE) lock............. 107 13 Flexible program indicator..........52 14 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56 24 Flash sync indicator.................... 282 15 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56 25 Aperture stop indicator...... 54, 308 Aperture (number of 26 Exposure indicator ....................... 57 stops) ..................................... 54, 308 Exposure compensation display.......................................... 109 16 HDR indicator...............................142 17 ADL indicator ...............................140 27 Flash compensation indicator ..................................... 151 18 Exposure/flash bracketing indicator.......................................198 28 Exposure compensation WB bracketing indicator ...........203 indicator ...................................... 110 ADL bracketing indicator..........207 29 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...................................... 103 19 Low battery warning ................... 26 20 ISO sensitivity indicator.............100 30 Number of exposures remaining...................................... 27 21 “k” (appears when memory Number of shots remaining before remains for over 1000 memory buffer fills ............ 68, 380 exposures)..................................... 27 Preset manual white balance 22 Flash-ready indicator .......... 36, 280 recording indicator ................... 122 23 FV lock indicator..........................154 * When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button, 0 284) or f3 (Assign preview button, 0 285) > Press, the selected button can be used to display a roll indicator in the viewfinder. Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes. D No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted. D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 11 The Monitor (Live View) To frame photos or movies in the monitor, rotate the live view selector to C (photo live view) or 1 (movie live view) and press the a button. a button Live view selector rotated to C Live view selector rotated to 1 D The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 279—5 s before the monitor is due to turn off automatically). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected. Movie recording will end automatically when the timer expires, regardless of the amount of recording time available. 12 ❚❚ Viewing and Hiding Indicators Press the R button to hide or display indicators in the monitor. R button C Mode If the live view selector is rotated to C (photo live view), pressing the R button cycles through the following displays. Virtual horizon Information on Framing guides Information off 13 1 Mode If the live view selector is rotated to 1 (movie live view), pressing the R button cycles through the following displays. Virtual horizon Information on Histogram 14 Information off Framing guides The Multi Selector In this manual, operations using the multi selector are represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons. 1: Press the multi selector up J button 4: Press the multi selector left 2: Press the multi selector right 3: Press the multi selector down 15 Camera Menus Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G button. G button Tabs Choose from the following menus: • D: Playback (0 266) • C: Photo Shooting (0 268) • 1: Movie Shooting (0 273) • A: Custom Settings (0 276) • B: Setup (0 289) • N: Retouch (0 294) • O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS (defaults to MY MENU; 0 297) Slider shows position in current menu. Current settings are shown by icons. Menu options Options in current menu. Help icon (0 17) 16 Using Camera Menus ❚❚ Menu Controls The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus. 1: Move cursor up J button: select highlighted item 4: Cancel and return to previous menu 2: Select highlighted item or display sub-menu 3: Move cursor down A The d (Help) Icon If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the L (U) button. A description of the currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the display. L (U) button 17 ❚❚ Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus. 1 Display the menus. Press the G button to display the menus. G button 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu. Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu. 3 Select a menu. Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu. 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu. Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu. 18 5 Highlight a menu item. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item. 6 Display options. Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item. 7 Highlight an option. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option. 8 Select the highlighted item. Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without making a selection, press the G button. Note the following: • Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available. • While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J. • To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway. 19 First Steps Follow the seven steps below to ready the camera for use. 1 Attach the strap. Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet. 20 2 Charge the battery. Insert the battery and plug the charger in (depending on the country or region, the charger comes with either an AC wall adapter or a power cable). An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and 35 minutes. • AC wall adapter: Insert the AC wall adapter into the charger AC inlet (q). Slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e). Insert the battery and plug the charger in. AC wall adapter latch 90 ° • Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug in the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the cable in. The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges. Battery charging Charging complete 21 3 Insert the battery and memory card. Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards, confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted. Battery latch If you are using only one memory card, insert it into slot 1 (0 27). Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. A The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xiii and 330–332 of this manual. 22 4 Attach a lens. Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap is removed. The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR. Remove the camera body cap Remove the rear lens cap Mounting mark (camera) Align the mounting marks Mounting mark (lens) Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures. 23 5 Turn the camera on. Power switch The control panel will light. If this is the first time the camera has been turned on, a language-selection dialog will be displayed. Control panel A Image Sensor Cleaning The camera vibrates the image sensor to remove dust when the camera is turned on or off (0 321). 6 Choose a language and Move cursor up set the camera clock. J button: select Use the multi selector and highlighted item J button to select a Select highlighted language and set the item or display subcamera clock. When menu setting the camera clock, Move cursor down you will be prompted to choose a time zone, date format, and daylight saving time option before setting the time and date; note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock. Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (0 290) and Time zone and date (0 290) options in the setup menu. 24 7 Focus the viewfinder. Rotate the diopter adjustment control until the AF area brackets are in sharp focus. When operating the control with your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye. AF area brackets Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus The camera is now ready for use. Proceed to page 30 for information on taking photographs. 25 ❚❚ Battery Level The battery level is shown in the control panel and viewfinder. Control panel Control panel L K J I H 26 Viewfinder Viewfinder Description — Battery fully charged. — — Battery partially discharged. — d H d (flashes) (flashes) Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare battery. Shutter release disabled. Charge or exchange battery. ❚❚ Number of Exposures Remaining The camera has two memory card slots: slot 1 and slot 2. Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays a backup or secondary role. If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 (0 82) when two memory cards are inserted, the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full. The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory card (the example at right shows the icons displayed when a card is inserted in each slot). If the memory card is full or locked or an error has occurred, the icon for the affected card will flash (0 344). The control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings (values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred; e.g., values between 1800 and 1899 are shown as 1.8 k). If two memory cards are inserted, the displays show the space available on the card in Slot 1. Slot 1 Slot 2 Control panel Number of exposures remaining Control panel Viewfinder 27 ❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards Removing the Battery Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand. After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and press the card in and then release it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w). 16GB Removing Memory Cards D Memory Cards • Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera. • Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card. • Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects. • Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks. • Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. • Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight. • Do not format memory cards in a computer. 28 A No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted, the control panel and viewfinder will show S. If the camera is turned off with a charged battery and no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the control panel. A The Write Protect Switch B 16G SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the “lock” Write-protect switch position, the memory card can not be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position. ❚❚ Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q) while turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap. D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 307), lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number). 29 Basic Photography and Playback “Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes) This section describes how to take photographs in i and j modes. i and j are automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions. 1 Turn the camera on. The control panel will light. 30 Power switch 2 Pressing the mode dial Mode dial lock release on top of the camera, rotate the mode dial to i or j. Mode dial lock release Photographs can be framed in the viewfinder or in the monitor (live view). To start live view, rotate the live view selector to C and press the a button. Live view selector a button Framing pictures in the viewfinder Framing pictures in the monitor (live view) 31 3 Ready the camera. Viewfinder photography: When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left. Bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest. Live view: When framing photographs in the monitor, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the lens with your left. A Framing Photographs in Portrait (Tall) Orientation When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, hold the camera as shown below. Framing photographs in the viewfinder 32 Framing photographs in the monitor 4 Frame the photograph. Viewfinder photography: Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the main subject in the AF area brackets. AF area brackets Live view: At default settings, the camera automatically detects faces and selects the focus point. If no face is detected, use the multi selector to position the focus point over the main subject. Focus point A Using a Zoom Lens Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject Zoom in so that it fills a larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to zoom out). Zoom out Zoom ring 33 5 Press the shutter-release button halfway. Viewfinder photography: Press the Focus point shutter-release button halfway to focus (the AF-assist illuminator may light if the subject is poorly lit). When the focus operation is complete, the active focus point and in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder. Focus indicator In-focus indicator I F H F H (flashes) Description Subject in focus. Focus point is between camera and subject. Focus point is behind subject. Camera unable to focus using autofocus. See page 96. Live view: The focus point flashes green while the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; otherwise, the focus point will flash red. Focus point 34 6 Shoot. Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph. The memory card access lamp will light and the Memory card access photograph will be lamp displayed in the monitor for a few seconds. Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete. To end live view, press the a button. a button 35 A The Built-in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. If the flash is raised, photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again. Viewfinder To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place. 36 Live view A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography) The viewfinder indicator display and control panel shutter speed and aperture display will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279). Exposure meters off Exposure meters on A The Monitor off Delay (Live View) The monitor will turn off if no operations are performed for about ten minutes. The length of time before the monitor turns off automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 279) > Live view. D Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with photographs and exposure, the rubber eyecup can be removed and the viewfinder covered with the supplied eyepiece cap before shooting (0 70). 37 A Live View Zoom Preview Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the selected focus point to a maximum magnification of about 19 ×. A navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to reposition the focus point or press W (S) to zoom out. X (T) button Navigation window A Exposure Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live view is not used. D Shooting in Live View Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while bright regions or bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion may occur with moving subjects, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using Flicker reduction (0 290), although they may still be visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry. 38 Basic Playback 1 Press the K button. A photograph will be displayed in the monitor. The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon. K button 2 View additional pictures. Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing 4 or 2. To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway. A Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 267), photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for a few seconds after shooting. A See Also See page 233 for information on choosing a memory card slot. 39 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O (Q) button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted. 1 Display the photograph. Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the preceding page. K button 2 Delete the photograph. Press the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press the O (Q) button again to delete the image and return to playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K. O (Q) button A Delete To delete selected images (0 248), all images taken on a selected date (0 249), or all images in a chosen location on a selected memory card (0 248), use the Delete option in the playback menu. 40 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on pages 30–35. To view the currently selected scene, rotate the mode dial to SCENE and press the R button. To choose another scene, rotate the main command dial. Mode dial Main command dial Monitor Note that the scene can not be changed during live view while the live view selector is in the 1 position. 41 ❚❚ Scenes Option k l p m n o r s t 42 Description Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking skin tones. If the subject is far from the background or a Portrait telephoto lens is used, background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth. Landscape Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight. 1, 2 Use for snapshots of children. Clothing and Child background details are vividly rendered, while skin tones remain soft and natural. Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic Sports sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly. 1, 2 Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other Close Up small objects (a macro lens can be used to focus at very close ranges). Use for a natural balance between the main subject Night Portrait and the background in portraits taken under low light. Reduce noise and unnatural colors when Night Landscape photographing night landscapes, including street lighting and neon signs. 1, 2 Capture the effects of indoor background lighting. Party/Indoor Use for parties and other indoor scenes. Capture the brightness of sunlight expanses of Beach/Snow water, snow, or sand. 1, 2 Option u Sunset v Dusk/Dawn w Pet Portrait x Candlelight Description Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises. 1, 2 Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before dawn or after sunset. 1, 2 Use for portraits of active pets. 2 For photographs taken by candlelight. 1 Use for fields of flowers, orchards in bloom, and y Blossom other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms. 1 Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn z Autumn Colors leaves. 1 Use for vivid photographs of food. For flash photography, press the M (Y) button to raise the 0 Food flash (0 146). 1 The built-in flash turns off. 2 The AF-assist illuminator turns off. A Preventing Blur Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds. 43 Special Effects Special effects can be used when taking photographs and shooting movies. To view the currently selected effect, rotate the mode dial to EFFECTS and press the R button. To choose another effect, rotate the main command dial. Mode dial Main command dial Monitor Note that the effect can not be changed during live view while the live view selector is in the 1 position. ❚❚ Special Effects Option % Night Vision g Color Sketch 44 Description Use under conditions of darkness to record monochrome images at high ISO sensitivities (manual focus is available if the camera is unable to focus). 1 The camera detects and colors outlines for a color sketch effect. The effect can be adjusted in live view (0 46). Note that movies recorded in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series of stills. Option Description Create photos that appear to be pictures of dioramas. Works best when shooting from a high vantage point. Miniature effect movies play back at i Miniature Effect high speed, compressing about 45 minutes of footage shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a silent movie that plays back in about three minutes. The effect can be adjusted in live view (0 47). 1, 2 All colors other than the selected colors are u Selective Color recorded in black and white. The effect can be adjusted in live view (0 49). 1 Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds. 1 1 Silhouette Use when shooting bright scenes to create bright 2 High Key images that seem filled with light. 1 Use when shooting dark scenes to create dark, low3 Low Key key images with prominent highlights. 1 1 The built-in flash turns off. 2 The AF-assist illuminator turns off. A Preventing Blur Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds. A NEF (RAW) NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, g, i, and u modes. Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images. JPEG images created at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG will be recorded at the selected JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be recorded as fine-quality images. A g and i Modes Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous release mode; using autofocus during live view will disrupt the preview. 45 Options Available in Live View Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view display but apply during live view and viewfinder photography and movie recording. ❚❚ g Color Sketch 1 Select live view. Press the a button. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor. a button 2 Adjust options. Press J to display the options shown at right. Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a washedout, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or thinner. Increasing the thickness of the lines also makes colors more saturated. 3 Press J. Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume viewfinder photography, press the a button. 46 ❚❚ i Miniature Effect 1 Select live view. Press the a button. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor. a button 2 Position the focus point. Use the multi selector to position the focus point in the area that will be in focus and then press the shutterrelease button halfway to check focus. To temporarily clear miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor for precise focus, press X (T). Press W (S) to restore the miniature effect display. 3 Display options. Press J to display miniature effect options. 47 4 Adjust options. Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area that will be in focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its width. 5 Press J. Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume viewfinder photography, press the a button. 48 ❚❚ u Selective Color 1 Select live view. Press the a button. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor. a button 2 Display options. Press J to display selective color options. 3 Select a color. Selected color Frame an object in the white square in the center of the display and press 1 to choose the color of the object as one that will remain in the final image (the camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the center of the display for more precise color selection, press X (T). Press W (S) to zoom out. 49 4 Choose the color range. Color range Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in the final image. Choose from values between 1 and 7; note that higher values may include hues from other colors. 5 Select additional colors. To select additional colors, rotate the main command dial to highlight another of the three color boxes at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3 and 4 to select another color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press O (Q). To remove all colors, press and hold O (Q). A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes. 6 Press J. Press J to exit when settings are complete. During shooting, only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To resume viewfinder photography, press the a button. 50 P, S, A, and M Modes P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture. Mode P S A M Description Programmed auto (0 52): Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings. Shutter-priority auto (0 53): User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion. Aperture-priority auto (0 54): User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus. Manual (0 56): User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to Bulb (A) or Time (%) for long timeexposures. A Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 307), lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring. Non-CPU lenses can only be used in modes A (aperture-priority auto) and M (manual), when aperture can only be adjusted using the lens aperture ring. Selecting any other mode disables the shutter release. For more information, see “Compatible Lenses” (0 304). 51 P: Programmed Auto In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations. A Flexible Program In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are on (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures (low f-numbers) that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures (high f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program indicator (O or E) is displayed. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off. 52 Main command dial Viewfinder Monitor S: Shutter-Priority Auto In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. To choose a shutter speed, rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on. Shutter speed can be set to “v” or to values between 30 s and 1 /8000 s. Main command dial Control panel Monitor A See Also See page 343 for information on what to do if flashing “A” or “%” indicator appears in the shutter-speed displays. 53 A: Aperture-Priority Auto In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. To choose an aperture between the minimum and maximum values for the lens, rotate the sub-command dial while the exposure meters are on. Sub-command dial Control panel Monitor A Non-CPU Lenses (0 308) Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens data item in setup menu (0 224) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f-number will be displayed, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring. 54 A Depth-of-Field Preview (Viewfinder Photography) To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera (modes P and S) or the value chosen by the user (modes A and M), allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder. Pv button A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash (Viewfinder Photography; 0 284) This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 311) will emit a modeling flash when the Pv button is pressed. 55 M: Manual In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “v” or to values between 30 s and 1/8000 s, or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A or %, 0 58). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to check exposure. Sub-command dial Aperture Shutter speed Main command dial A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture. 56 A The Exposure Indicators If a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the exposure indicators show whether the photograph would be under- or overexposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278), the amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the exposure indicators and the shutter speed (modes P and A) and/or aperture (modes P and S) displays will flash. Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step Underexposed by Overexposed by Optimal exposure 1/3 EV 2 EV Control panel Viewfinder (viewfinder photography) Monitor (live view) A See Also For information on reversing the exposure indicators so that negative values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see Custom Setting f8 (Reverse indicators, 0 286). 57 Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. • Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or Length of exposure: 35 s Aperture: f/25 an optional wireless remote controller (0 160, 319) or remote cord (0 319). • Time (%): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button on the camera or on an optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller. The shutter remains open until the button is pressed a second time. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 70). Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing On for Long exposure NR in the photo shooting menu (0 271). 58 ❚❚ Bulb 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. Mode dial 2 Choose a shutter speed. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of “Bulb” (A). Main command dial Control panel Monitor 3 Take the photograph. After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or on the optional wireless remote controller or remote cord all the way down. Remove your finger from the shutter-release button when the exposure is complete. 59 ❚❚ Time 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. Mode dial 2 Choose a shutter speed. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial left to choose a shutter speed of “Time” (%). Main command dial Control panel Monitor 3 Open the shutter. After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller all the way down. 4 Close the shutter. Repeat the operation performed in Step 3. 60 A ML-L3 Remote Controls If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select a remote control mode (Delayed remote, Quick-response remote, or Remote mirrorup) using the Remote control mode (ML-L3) option in the photo shooting menu (0 156). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures will be taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for shutter speed. The exposure starts when the shutterrelease button on the remote control is pressed and ends after 30 minutes or when the button is pressed again. 61 User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial. Saving User Settings 1 Select a mode. Mode dial Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode. 2 Adjust settings. Make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture (modes A and M), exposure and flash compensation, flash mode, focus point, metering, autofocus and AF-area modes, bracketing, and settings in the shooting and Custom Settings menus. A User Settings The following can not be saved to U1 or U2. Photo shooting menu: Movie shooting menu: • Reset photo shooting menu • Reset movie shooting menu • Storage folder • Image area • Image area • Manage Picture Control • Manage Picture Control • Time-lapse photography • Remote control mode (ML-L3) • Multiple exposure • Interval timer shooting 62 3 Select Save user settings. Press the G button to display the menus. Highlight Save user settings in the setup menu and press 2. G button 4 Select Save to U1 or Save to U2. Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2 and press 2. 5 Save user settings. Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial position selected in Step 4. 63 Recalling User Settings Simply rotate the mode dial to Mode dial U1 to recall the settings assigned to Save to U1, or to U2 to recall the settings assigned to Save to U2. 64 Resetting User Settings To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values: 1 Select Reset user settings. Press the G button to display the menus. Highlight Reset user settings in the setup menu and press 2. G button 2 Select Reset U1 or Reset U2. Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and press 2. 3 Reset user settings. Highlight Reset and press J. 65 Release Mode Choosing a Release Mode To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting. Mode S CL CH Q E Description Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutterrelease button is pressed. Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 (Continuous low-speed, 0 67, 280). Note that only one picture will be taken if the flash fires. Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera records photographs at frame rate given on page 67. Use for active subjects. Note that only one picture will be taken if the flash fires. Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not click back into place while shutter-release button is fully pressed, allowing user to control timing of click made by mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. In addition, beep does not sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 280). Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 69). Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in MUP which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs (0 71). 66 Frame Advance Rate The frame rate for continuous shooting (low and high speed) varies with the option chosen for image area (0 73) and, when an NEF (RAW) image quality option is selected, the NEF (RAW) bit depth (0 80). The table below gives the approximate frame rates for a fully-charged EN-EL15 battery, continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1 /250 s or faster, and the remaining settings at default values. Image area DX (24×16) 1.3× (18×12) Image quality JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW) 14-bit NEF (RAW) JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW) 14-bit NEF (RAW) Approximate frame advance rate CL CH 1–6 fps 6 fps 1–5 fps 5 fps 7 fps 1–6 fps 6 fps Frame rates may drop at extremely small apertures (high fnumbers) or slow shutter speeds, when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control (0 102) is on, or when the battery is low, a non-CPU lens is attached, or Aperture ring is selected for Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials) > Aperture setting (0 285). The maximum frame rate in live view is 3.7 fps. 67 A The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. The frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (tAA). The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustrations below show the display when space remains in the buffer for about 42 pictures. While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card. A Live View If a continuous release mode is used during live view, photographs will be displayed in place of the view through the lens while the shutterrelease button is pressed. A See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max. continuous release, 0 280). For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 380. 68 Self-Timer Mode (E) The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits. 1 Mount the camera on a tripod. Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface. 2 Select self-timer mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to E. Release mode dial 3 Frame the photograph and focus. The self-timer can not be used if the camera is unable to focus using single-servo AF or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released. 4 Start the timer. Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the timer. The selftimer lamp will start to flash. Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the selftimer lamp will stop flashing. The shutter will be released about ten seconds after the timer starts. To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the release mode dial to another setting. 69 A Cover the Viewfinder When taking photos without your eye to the viewfinder, remove the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied eyepiece cap as shown (w). This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in photographs or interfering with exposure. Hold the camera firmly when removing the rubber eyecup. Rubber eyecup Eyepiece cap D Using the Built-in Flash Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the flash-ready indicator (M) to be displayed (0 146). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has started. Note that only one photograph will be taken when the flash fires, regardless of the number of exposures selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 279). A See Also For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 279). For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the self-timer is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 280). 70 Mirror up Mode (MUP) Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised. To use mirror-up mode, press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to MUP (mirror up). Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial After pressing the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. The viewfinder or monitor will turn off; in viewfinder photography, the mirror will be raised. Press the shutter-release button all the way down again to take the picture. When shooting ends, either live view will resume or (in viewfinder photography) the mirror will lower. D Mirror Up While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed. A Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s with the mirror raised. 71 A Preventing Blur To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutterrelease button smoothly, or use an optional remote cord (0 319). For information on using the optional ML-L3 remote control for mirror-up photography, see page 156. Use of a tripod is recommended. 72 Image Recording Options Image Area Choose an image area from DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12). Option a DX (24×16) Z 1.3× (18×12) Description Pictures are recorded using a 23.5 × 15.6 mm image area (DX format). Pictures are recorded using a 18.8 × 12.5 mm image area, producing a telephoto effect without the need to change lenses. The camera can also record more images per second during continuous shooting (0 67). Viewfinder display Photo with DX image area (24×16) Photo with image area of 1.3× (18×12) 73 A Image Area The selected option is shown in the display. Information display Shooting display A The Viewfinder Display The viewfinder display for the 1.3× DX crop is shown at right. A s icon is displayed in the viewfinder when the 1.3× DX crop is selected. 1.3× DX crop A See Also See page 168 for information on the crops available when the live view selector is rotated to 1. See page 380 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored at different image area settings. 74 The image area can be selected using the Image area option in the shooting menus or by pressing a control and rotating a command dial. ❚❚ The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area. Highlight Image area in either of the shooting menus and press 2. 2 Adjust settings. Choose an option and press J. The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 74). A Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area (0 81). 75 ❚❚ Camera Controls In viewfinder photography, the image area can also be selected with the Fn button and command dials. 1 Assign image area selection to a camera control. Select Choose image area as the “Press + command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu. Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f2, Assign Fn button, 0 284), the Pv button (Custom Setting f3, Assign preview button, 0 285), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f4, Assign AE-L/ AF-L button, 0 285). 2 Use the selected control to choose an image area. The image area can be selected by pressing the selected button and rotating the main or sub-command dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 74). The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing the button to display the image area in the control panel, viewfinder, or information display. 76 Fn button Main command dial Image Quality and Size Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card (0 380). Image Quality Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality). Option File type Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such NEF (RAW) NEF as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting. Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of JPEG fine roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality). * Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of JPEG normal JPEG roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality). * Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of JPEG basic roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality). * NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) JPEG fine image and one fine-quality JPEG image. NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) JPEG normal JPEG image and one normal-quality JPEG image. NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) JPEG basic image and one basic-quality JPEG image. * Size priority selected for JPEG compression. The compression ratio is an approximation only; the actual ratio varies with ISO sensitivity and the scene recorded. 77 Image quality can be set by pressing the X (T) button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the information display. X (T) button Main command dial Information display A NEF (RAW) Images The option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using Capture NX-D or other software or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 295). A NEF+JPEG When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role played by card in Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image. 78 A + NEF (RAW) If + NEF (RAW) is assigned to the Fn button using Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button, 0 284) > Press and a JPEG option is selected for image quality, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next photograph taken after the Fn button is pressed (the original image quality setting will be restored when you remove your finger from the shutter-release button). To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again. A The Photo Shooting Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the photo shooting menu (0 268). 79 ❚❚ JPEG Compression To choose the type of compression for JPEG images, highlight JPEG compression in the photo shooting menu and press 2. Option O P Description Images are compressed to produce relatively Size priority uniform file size. Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene Optimal quality recorded. ❚❚ Type To choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images, highlight NEF (RAW) recording > Type in the photo shooting menu and press 2. Option N Lossless compressed O Compressed Description NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality. NEF images are compressed using a nonreversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 35–55% with almost no effect on image quality. ❚❚ NEF (RAW) Bit Depth To choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images, highlight NEF (RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth in the photo shooting menu and press 2. Option q 12-bit r 14-bit 80 Description NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits. NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded. Image Size Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from # Large, $ Medium, or % Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area, 0 73): Option Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.) * Large 6000 × 4000 50.8 × 33.9/20.0 × 13.3 DX (24×16) Medium 4496 × 3000 38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10.0 Small 2992 × 2000 25.3 × 16.9/10.0 × 6.7 Large 4800 × 3200 40.6 × 27.1/16.0 × 10.7 1.3× (18×12) Medium 3600 × 2400 30.5 × 20.3/12.0 × 8.0 Small 2400 × 1600 20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3 * Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm). Image area Image size can be set by pressing the X (T) button and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the information display. X (T) button Sub-command dial Information display A The Photo Shooting Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the photo shooting menu (0 269). 81 Using Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can use the Role played by card in Slot 2 item in the photo shooting menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot 2. Choose from Overflow (the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is full), Backup (each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2), and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 (as for Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2). A “Backup” and “RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2” The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full. A Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to record movies can be selected using the Destination option in the movie shooting menu (0 273). 82 Focus Focus can be adjusted automatically (see below) or manually (0 97). The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 89) or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 93). Autofocus To use autofocus, rotate the focus-mode selector to AF. Focus-mode selector Autofocus Mode The following autofocus modes can be selected during viewfinder photography: Mode Description Auto-servo AF: Camera automatically selects single-servo AF-A autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving. Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter AF-S can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus priority; 0 276). Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking AF-C (0 85) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus (release priority; 0 276). 83 The following autofocus modes can be selected during live view: Mode Description Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterAF-S release button is pressed halfway. Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses AF-F continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing the AFmode button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed. AF-mode button Control panel Viewfinder 84 Monitor Main command dial A Predictive Focus Tracking (Viewfinder Photography) In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released. A See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 276). For information on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 276). See Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials) > Change main/sub (0 285) for information on using the sub-command dial to choose the focus mode. 85 AF-Area Mode AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus. The following options are available during viewfinder photography: • Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 89; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. • Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 89. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point. The number of focus points varies with the mode selected: - 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track). - 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game). - 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds). 86 • 3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 89. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as required. Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point. • Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point (in the case of portrait subjects, the camera is able to distinguish the subject from the background for improved subject detection). The active focus points are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus points have turned off. A 3D-tracking When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame. 87 The following AF-area modes can be selected during live view: • ! Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated by a double yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to choose a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will no longer be displayed. • $ Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait subjects. • % Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is recommended. 88 • & Subject-tracking AF: Use the multi selector to position the focus point over your subject and press J to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end tracking, press J again. Note that the camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the background. A Manual Focus-Point Selection The multi selector can be used to select the focus point. Rotating the focus selector lock to L disables manual focus-point selection. Focus selector lock 89 AF-area mode can be selected by pressing the AF-mode button and rotating the subcommand dial until the desired setting is displayed. AF-mode button Control panel Viewfinder Sub-command dial Monitor A AF-Area Mode (Viewfinder Photography) AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder. AF-area mode Control panel Viewfinder Single-point AF 9-point dynamic-area AF * 21-point dynamic-area AF * 51-point dynamic-area AF * 3D-tracking Auto-area AF * Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation. 90 D Using Autofocus in Live View Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations: • The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame • The subject lacks contrast • The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness • Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar lighting • A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used • The subject appears smaller than the focus point • The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper) • The subject is moving A Focus-Point Selection Except in subject-tracking AF, pressing J during focus-point selection selects the center focus point. In subject-tracking AF, pressing J starts subject tracking instead. Manual focus-point selection is not available in auto-area AF or if a face is detected when face-priority AF is selected in live view. 91 A See Also Viewfinder photography: For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see Custom Setting a5 (Focus point illumination) > AF point illumination (0 277). For information on setting focuspoint selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a6 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 277). For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see Custom Setting a7 (Number of focus points, 0 277). For information on choosing separate focus points for vertical and horizontal orientations, see Custom Setting a8 (Store points by orientation, 0 277). Viewfinder photography/live view: See Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials) > Change main/sub (0 285) for information on using the main command dial to choose the AF-area mode. 92 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (0 96), focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode (0 86). 1 Focus. Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder (viewfinder photography) or that the focus point has turned green (live view). Viewfinder photography Live view 93 2 Lock focus. AF-A and AF-C focus modes (viewfinder photography): With the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q), press the A AE-L/AF-L button (w) to lock focus. Focus will remain locked while the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Shutter-release button A AE-L/AF-L button AF-S (viewfinder photography) and live view: Focus locks automatically and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button (see above). 94 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot. Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway (AF-S and live view) or keep the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. Viewfinder photography Live view Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance. A See Also Pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 107). See Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285) for information on choosing the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button. 95 A Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 97) or use focus lock (0 93) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph. There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background. Example: Subject is the same color as the background. The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera. Example: Subject is inside a cage. The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns. Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper. The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness. Example: Subject is half in the shade. Background objects appear larger than the subject. Example: A building is in the frame behind the subject. The subject contains many fine details. Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness. 96 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results (0 96). • AF lenses: Set the lens focus Focus-mode selector mode switch (if present) and camera focus-mode selector to M. D AF Lenses Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and the camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or lens. This does not apply to AF-S lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting the camera focus-mode selector to M. • Manual focus lenses: Focus manually. To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the subject is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus. 97 ❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder (Viewfinder Photography) The viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points). After positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with the subjects listed on page 96, the infocus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting. For information on using the electronic rangefinder with optional AF-S/AF-I teleconverters, see page 307. A Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera, measure from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.). 46.5 mm Focal plane mark A Live View Press the X (T) button to zoom in for precise focus in live view (0 38). X (T) button 98 ISO Sensitivity The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the amount of light available. Choose from settings that range from ISO 100 to ISO 25600 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Auto, scene, and special effect modes also offer an AUTO option, which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions. Settings of Hi BW1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and Hi BW2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are also available, but note that pictures taken with either setting are recorded in monochrome using the options selected for Set Picture Control > Monochrome in the photo shooting menu (0 130). The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Modes P, S, A, M % Other shooting modes Options 100–25600; Hi BW1 and Hi BW2 Auto Auto; 100–25600 99 ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the W (S) button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed. W (S) button Main command dial Control panel Viewfinder Information display A The Photo Shooting Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted from the photo shooting menu. Choose ISO sensitivity settings in photo shooting menu to adjust settings for photographs (0 271). A Live View In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor. 100 ❚❚ Hi BW1/Hi BW2 In P, S, A, and M modes, Hi BW1 and Hi BW2 can be selected using the ISO sensitivity settings (0 271) > ISO sensitivity option in the photo shooting menu. A Hi ISO Command Dial Access If On is chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Hi ISO command dial access (0 271), Hi BW1 and Hi BW2 can be selected by pressing the W (S) button and rotating the main command dial. If Off is chosen for Hi ISO command dial access while Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 is selected, rotating the main command dial will have no effect, but ISO sensitivity can still be adjusted from the menus. A Restrictions on Hi BW1 and Hi BW2 Note the following restrictions when using Hi BW1 or Hi BW2: • Image quality and size can not be changed when Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 is selected. Pictures shot with NEF (RAW) selected for image quality are recorded in fine-quality JPEG format. If an NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is selected, only the JPEG image will be recorded. • Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 102), Active D-Lighting (0 139), HDR (0 141), multiple exposure (0 211), and time-lapse photography (0 171) are not available. A See Also For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value; 0 278). For information on adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the W (S) button, see Custom Setting d8 (Easy ISO; 0 281). For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menus to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see pages 271 and 275. 101 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the flash is used). 1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control. Select ISO sensitivity settings in the photo shooting menu, highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control and press 2. 2 Select On. Highlight On and press J (if Off is selected, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user). 102 3 Adjust settings. The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using Maximum sensitivity (note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the user will be used instead). In modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user). If Auto is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens. Press J to exit when settings are complete. ISO AUTO is displayed when On is selected. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, these indicators flash and the altered value is shown in the control panel. A Live View In live view, the auto ISO sensitivity control indicator is displayed in the monitor. 103 A Minimum Shutter Speed Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note, however, that Auto functions only with CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is used without lens data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at 1/30 s. Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for Maximum sensitivity. A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control When a flash is used, minimum shutter speed will be set to the value selected for Minimum shutter speed unless this value is faster than Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 282) or slower than Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed, 0 283), in which case the value selected for Custom Setting e2 will be used instead. Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional flash units listed on page 311), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds. A Enabling and Disabling Auto ISO Senstivity Control You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by pressing the W (S) button and rotating the sub-command dial. ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on. 104 Exposure Metering (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the camera selects the metering method automatically). Option a Z b Description Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses (0 307), distance information (3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which does not include 3D distance information). Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area for viewfinder photography can be selected using Custom Setting b4, Center-weighted area, 0 278; if non-CPU lens is attached, area is equivalent to circle 8 mm in diameter). Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×. Spot: Camera meters circle centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center focus point). Diameter of circle for viewfinder photography is 3.5 mm (0.14 in.), or approximately 2.5% of frame. Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker. 105 To choose a metering option, press the Z (Q) button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed. Z (Q) button Main command dial Control panel A Live View In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor. A Non-CPU Lens Data Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu (0 225) allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is selected. Center-weighted metering will be used if matrix metering is selected with non-CPU lenses for which lens data have not been supplied. A See Also For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see Custom Setting b5 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 278). 106 Autoexposure Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using center-weighted metering and spot metering (0 105) to meter exposure. 1 Lock exposure. Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point, press the A AE-L/ AF-L button to lock focus and exposure (if you are using autofocus, confirm that the camera is in focus; 0 34). Shutter-release button A AE-L/AF-L button While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the viewfinder and the monitor. 2 Recompose the photograph. Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot. 107 A Spot Metering In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered at the selected focus point (0 105). A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure: Mode P S A Setting Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 52) Shutter speed Aperture Note that metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect. A See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 279), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the role of the A AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285). 108 Exposure Compensation (P, S, A, M, SCENE, and % Modes Only) Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering (0 105). Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker. –1 EV No exposure compensation To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed. +1 EV E button Main command dial ±0 EV –0.3 (–1/3) EV +2.0 EV 109 At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the center of the exposure indicators will flash (modes P, S, A, SCENE, and %) and a E icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the E button. The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E button. Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. Except in SCENE and % modes, exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in SCENE and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ). A Mode M In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. A Exposure Compensation (Live View) When the live view selector is rotated to C, exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 and +5 EV, but only values between –3 and +3 can be previewed in the monitor. A See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278). For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation, 0 278). For information on restricting the effects of exposure compensation to the background when using a flash for foreground lighting, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 283). For information on automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see page 197. 110 White Balance (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. In modes other than P, S, A, and M, white balance is set automatically by the camera. Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources in P, S, A, and M modes, but other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source: Option Color temp. * v Auto Normal Keep warm lighting colors Incandescent 3500–8000 K J I Fluorescent H N G M K L 3000 K Sodium-vapor lamps 2700 K Warm-white fluorescent 3000 K White fluorescent 3700 K Cool-white fluorescent 4200 K Day white fluorescent 5000 K Daylight fluorescent 6500 K High temp. mercury-vapor 7200 K Direct sunlight 5200 K Flash 5400 K Cloudy 6000 K 8000 K Shade Choose color temp. (0 117) 2500–10,000 K Preset manual (0 120) * All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable). — 111 White balance is set by pressing the L (U) button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed. L (U) button Main command dial Information display A Live View In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor. A The Shooting Menus White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in either of the shooting menus (0 269, 274), which also can be used to fine-tune white balance (0 114) or measure a value for preset manual white balance (0 120). The Auto option in the White balance menu offers a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting, while the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from the bulb types. The item in the movie shooting menu offers a Same as photo settings option that sets the white balance for movies to the same as that used for photographs. A Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use preset manual white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance. 112 A Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue. “Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors q I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K w J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K e I (white fluorescent): 3700 K r I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K t I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K y H (direct sunlight): 5200 K u N (flash): 5400 K i G (cloudy): 6000 K o I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K !0 I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K !1 M (shade): 8000 K Note: All figures are approximate. 113 Fine-Tuning White Balance At settings other than K (Choose color temp.), white balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. ❚❚ The White Balance Menu To fine-tune white balance from the shooting menus, select White balance and follow the steps below. 1 Display fine-tuning options. Highlight a white balance option and press 2 (if a sub-menu is displayed, select the desired option and press 2 again to display fine-tuning options; for information on fine-tuning preset manual white balance, see page 129). 2 Fine tune white balance. Use the multi selector to fine-tune white balance. White balance can be fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)– magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The Coordinates horizontal (amber-blue) axis Adjustment corresponds to color temperature, while the vertical (green-magenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units. 114 3 Press J. Press J to save settings and return to the shooting menus. ❚❚ The L (U) Button At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset manual), the L (U) button can be used to fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 114; to finetune white balance when L is L (U) button Sub-command dial selected, use the shooting menus as described on page 129). Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial to fine-tune white balance in steps of 0.5 (with each full increment equivalent to about 5 mired) until the desired value is displayed. Rotating the sub-command dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the sub-command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). Control panel Information display A Live View In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor. 115 A White Balance Fine-Tuning If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“E”) will be displayed next to the white balance setting. Note that the colors on the finetuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue. Information display Shooting display A “Mired” Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.: • 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired • 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired A See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set, 0 284), the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance (0 202). 116 Choosing a Color Temperature Follow the steps below to choose a color temperature when K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance. D Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate. ❚❚ The White Balance Menu Color temperature can be selected using the White balance options in the shooting menus. Enter values for the amber–blue and green–magenta axes (0 114) as described below. 1 Select Choose color temp. Select White balance in either of the shooting menus, then highlight Choose color temp. and press 2. 2 Select a value for amber-blue. Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change. Value for amber (A)blue (B) axis 117 3 Select a value for green-magenta. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G (green) or M (magenta) axis and press 1 or 3 to select a value. Value for green (G)magenta (M) axis 4 Press J. Press J to save changes and return to the shooting menus. If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)– magenta (M) axis, an asterisk (“E”) will be displayed next to the K icon. 118 ❚❚ The L (U) Button When K (Choose color temp.) is selected, the L (U) button can be used to select the color temperature, although only for the amber (A)–blue (B) axis. Press the L (U) button and L (U) button Sub-command rotate the sub-command dial dial until the desired value is displayed (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 116). To enter a color temperature directly, press the L (U) button and press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to change. Control panel Information display A Live View In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor. 119 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to six values for preset manual white balance in presets d-1 through d-6. Two methods are available for setting preset manual white balance: Method Direct measurement Copy from existing photograph Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo and white balance measured by camera. In live view, white balance can be measured in a selected area of the frame (spot white balance, 0 124). White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0 127). Viewfinder Photography 1 Light a reference object. Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance; in mode M, adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 57). 120 2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual). Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in the information display. L (U) button Main command dial Information display 3 Select a preset. Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in the information display. L (U) button Sub-command dial Information display A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder Photography) Preset manual white balance can not be measured while you are shooting an HDR photograph (0 141) or multiple exposure (0 211), or when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1. 121 4 Select direct measurement mode. Release the L (U) button briefly and then press the button until D starts to flash in the control panel and viewfinder. Control panel Viewfinder 5 Measure white balance. In the few seconds before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 3. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus. A Protected Presets If the current preset is protected (0 129), 3 or Prt will flash in the control panel, viewfinder, and information display if you attempt to measure a new value. 122 6 Check the results. If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance, C will flash in the control panel, while the viewfinder will show a flashing a. Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. Control panel Viewfinder If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to Step 5 and measure white balance again. Control panel Viewfinder D Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279). A Selecting a Preset Selecting Preset manual for the White balance option in either of the shooting menus displays the dialog shown at right; highlight a preset and press J. If no value currently exists for the selected preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as Direct sunlight. 123 Live View (Spot White Balance) During live view, white balance can be measured directly from any white or gray object in the frame. 1 Press the a button. The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor. a button 2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual). Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in the monitor. L (U) button Main command dial 124 Monitor 3 Select a preset. Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in the monitor. L (U) button Sub-command dial Monitor 4 Select direct measurement mode. Release the L (U) button briefly and then press the button until the L icon in the monitor starts to flash. A spot white balance target (r) will be displayed at the selected focus point. Monitor 5 Position the target over a white or grey area. While L flashes in the display, use the multi selector to position the r over a white or grey area of the subject. To zoom the area around the target in for more precise positioning, press the X (T) button. 125 6 Measure white balance. Press J or press the shutter-release button all the way down to measure white balance. The time available to measure white balance is that selected for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay) > Live view (0 279). If the camera is unable to measure white balance, the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose a new white balance target and repeat the process from Step 5. 7 Exit direct measurement mode. Press the L (U) button to exit direct measurement mode. When Preset manual is selected for White balance in either of the shooting menus, the position of the target used to measure preset manual white balance will be displayed on presets recorded during live view. A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View) Preset manual white balance can not be measured when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1. Preset manual white balance can not be set while an HDR exposure is in progress (0 141). 126 Managing Presets ❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset. 1 Select Preset manual. Select White balance in either of the shooting menus, then highlight Preset manual and press 2. 2 Select a destination. Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-6) and press W (S). W (S) button 3 Choose Select image. Highlight Select image and press 2. 127 4 Highlight a source image. Highlight the source image. 5 Copy white balance. Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted photograph has a comment (0 291), the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset. A Choosing a Source Image To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame, press and hold the X (T) button. X (T) button 128 A Choosing a White Balance Preset Press 1 to highlight the current white balance preset (d-1– d-6) and press 2 to select another preset. A Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white balance as described on page 114. A Edit Comment To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-balance preset, select Edit comment in the preset manual white balance menu and enter a comment as described on page 136. A Protect To protect the current white-balance preset, select Protect in the preset manual white balance menu, then highlight On and press J. Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune and Edit comment options can not be used. 129 Image Enhancement Picture Controls (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) In P, S, A, and M modes, your choice of Picture Control determines how pictures are processed (in other modes, the camera selects a Picture Control automatically). Selecting a Picture Control Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene. Option Q R S T e f q Description Standard processing for balanced results. Standard Recommended for most situations. Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later be processed or Neutral retouched. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Vivid Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors. Monochrome Take monochrome photographs. Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a Portrait rounded feel. Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes. Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from Flat highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched. A The Movie Shooting Menu The Set Picture Control option in the movie shooting menu also offers a Same as photo settings option that sets the Picture Control for movies to the same as that used for photographs. 130 1 Select Set Picture Control. Highlight Set Picture Control in either of the shooting menus and press 2. 2 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a Picture Control and press J. A Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menus (0 135). Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software (0 138). A The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the display. Information display Shooting display 131 Modifying Picture Controls Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 135) can be modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual settings. 1 Select a Picture Control. Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list (0 130) and press 2. 2 Adjust settings. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25 (0 133). Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select a preset combination of settings by using the multi selector to choose Quick adjust. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button. 3 Press J. A Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“E”). 132 ❚❚ Picture Control Settings Option Manual adjustments (all Picture Controls) Description Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments). Quick adjust Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, Flat, or custom Picture Controls (0 135). Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust Sharpening sharpening automatically according to the type of scene. Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the camera adjust clarity automatically. Depending on the scene, Clarity shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects at some settings. Clarity is not applied to movies. Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera Contrast adjust contrast automatically. Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in Brightness highlights or shadows. Manual adjustments Manual adjustments (non-monochrome only) (monochrome only) Saturation Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene. Hue Adjust hue. Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs (0 134). Toning Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs (0 135). 133 D “A” (Auto) Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G, E, or D lens for best results. A Switching Between Manual and Auto Press the X (T) button to switch back and forth between manual and auto (A) settings for sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation. A Custom Picture Control Options The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based. A Previous Settings The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference when adjusting settings. A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only) The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available: Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the Orange brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more R Red contrast than orange. G Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits. Y O Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters. 134 A Toning (Monochrome Only) Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available when B&W (black-and-white) is selected. Creating Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls. 1 Select Manage Picture Control. Highlight Manage Picture Control in either of the shooting menus and press 2. 2 Select Save/edit. Highlight Save/edit and press 2. 3 Select a Picture Control. Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2, or press J to proceed to Step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification. 135 4 Edit the selected Picture Control. See page 133 for more information. To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the O (Q) button. Press J when settings are complete. 5 Select a destination. Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2. 6 Name the Picture Control. Keyboard area The text-entry dialog shown at right will be displayed. By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to use the default name, proceed to Step 7. To Name area move the cursor in the name area, hold the W (S) button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press J. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O (Q) button. Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted. 136 7 Press X (T). Press the X (T) button to save changes and exit. The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list. X (T) button A Manage Picture Control > Rename Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu. A Manage Picture Control > Delete The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed. A The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display. Original Picture Control icon 137 A Sharing Custom Picture Controls The Load/save item in the Manage Picture Control menu offers the options listed below. Use these options to copy custom Picture Controls to and from memory cards (these options are available only with the memory card in Slot 1 and can not be used with the card in Slot 2). Once copied to memory cards, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software. • Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory card. • Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and name them as desired. • Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card. 138 Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) Active D-Lighting Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with matrix metering (0 105). Active D-Lighting off Active D-Lighting: Y Auto D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting” The Active D-Lighting option in the photo shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 294) brightens shadows in images after shooting. 139 To use Active D-Lighting: 1 Select Active D-Lighting. Highlight Active D-Lighting in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 2 Choose an option. Highlight the desired option and press J. If Y Auto is selected, the camera will automatically adjust Active D-Lighting according to shooting conditions (in mode M, however, Y Auto is equivalent to Q Normal). D Active D-Lighting With some subjects, you may notice uneven shading, shadows around bright objects, or halos around dark objects. A See Also When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set, 0 284), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of shots (0 207). If desired, the Fn button and main command dial can be used to select Active D-Lighting; for more information, see Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button, 0 284). 140 High Dynamic Range (HDR) Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when used with matrix metering (0 105; with spot or center-weighted metering and a non-CPU lens, a strength of Auto is equivalent to Normal). It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. Flash lighting, bracketing (0 197), multiple exposure (0 211), and time-lapse photography (0 171) can not be used while HDR is in effect and shutter speeds of A and % are not available. + First exposure (darker) Second exposure (brighter) Combined HDR image 1 Select HDR (high dynamic range). Highlight HDR (high dynamic range) in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 141 2 Select a mode. Highlight HDR mode and press 2. Highlight one of the following and press J. • To take a series of HDR photographs, select 6 On (series). HDR shooting will continue until you select Off for HDR mode. • To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single HDR photograph. • To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off. If On (series) or On (single photo) is selected, an l icon will be displayed in the viewfinder. 3 Choose the HDR strength. To choose the difference in exposure between the two shots (HDR strength), highlight HDR strength and press 2. Highlight the desired option and press J. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically adjust HDR strength to suit the scene. 142 Viewfinder 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. l j will flash in the control panel and l l in the viewfinder while the images are combined; no photographs can be taken until recording is complete. Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode, only one photograph will be taken each time the shutterrelease button is pressed. Control panel Viewfinder If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The l icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends. D Framing HDR Photographs The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, the effect may not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. A Interval Timer Photography If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer shooting will end after a single shot). 143 Flash Photography Using the Built-in Flash The built-in flash can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a catch light to the subject’s eyes. Auto Pop-up Modes In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and g modes, the built-in flash automatically pops up and fires as required. 1 Choose a flash mode. Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed. M (Y) button Main command dial Information display A Live View In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor. 144 2 Take pictures. The flash will pop up as required when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway and fire when a photograph is taken. If the flash does not pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the flash. ❚❚ Flash Modes The following flash modes are available: Auto flash: When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit, the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required. Not available in o mode. Auto with red-eye reduction: Use for portraits. The flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not available in o mode. Auto slow sync with red-eye reduction: As for auto with red-eye reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting. Use for portraits taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode. Auto slow sync: Slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode. j Off: The flash does not fire. 145 Manual Pop-up Modes In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The flash will not fire if it is not raised. 1 Raise the flash. Press the M (Y) button to raise the flash. Note that if the flash is off or an optional external flash unit is attached, the built-in flash will not pop up; proceed to Step 2. M (Y) button 2 Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only). Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed. M (Y) button Main command dial Information display 3 Take pictures. If an option other than j is selected, the flash will fire whenever a picture is taken. A Live View In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor. 146 ❚❚ Flash Modes The following flash modes are available: Fill flash: The flash fires with every shot. Red-eye reduction: Use for portraits. The flash fires with every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not available in 0 mode. Red-eye reduction with slow sync: As for “red-eye reduction”, above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in portraits. Not available in modes S, M, and 0. Slow sync: As for “fill flash”, above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes S, M, and 0. Slow rear-curtain sync: As for “rear-curtain sync”, below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes S, M, and 0. S is displayed when setting is complete. Rear-curtain sync: The flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light sources as shown below at right. Not available in modes P, A, and 0. Front-curtain sync j Rear-curtain sync Off: The flash does not fire. Not available in 0 mode. 147 A Lowering the Built-in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place. D The Built-in Flash Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function. i-TTL flash control is available at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800; at values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture values. If the flash fires in continuous release modes (0 66), only one picture will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause. A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash. Mode Shutter speed 1/250–1/60 s i, p, n, s, w, 0, g, P *, A * 1/250–1/30 s k 1/250–1 s o 1/250–30 s S* 1 M* /250–30 s, A, % * Speeds as fast as 1/8000 s are available with optional flash units that support auto FP highspeed sync when 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 282). When 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected, shutter speeds as fast as 1/320 s are available with the built-in flash. 148 A Flash Control Mode The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes: • i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 2016-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G, E, or D lens is used, distance information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum aperture; see page 224). Not available when spot metering is used. • Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected. A Metering Select matrix or center-weighted metering to activate i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR. Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected. 149 A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture. 100 1.4 2 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 200 2 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 22 Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 m ft 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 0.7–8.5 2ft 4in.–27ft 10in. 4 5.6 8 11 16 22 0.6–6.0 2ft–19ft 8in. 5.6 8 11 16 22 32 0.6–4.2 2ft–13ft 9in. 8 11 16 22 32 — 0.6–3.0 2ft–9ft 10in. 11 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.1 2ft–6ft 10in. 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.5 2ft–4ft 11in. 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.1 2ft–3ft 7in. 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.8 2ft–2ft 7in. The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft). In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below: 100 2.8 200 3.5 Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of: 400 800 1600 3200 4 5 5.6 7.1 6400 8 12800 10 If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens. A See Also See page 153 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph. Menu options relevant to this section are listed below. • Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed): Enable or disable auto FP highspeed sync and choose a flash sync speed (0 282) • Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed): Choose the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash (0 283) • Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash): Choose a flash control mode (0 283) 150 Flash Compensation (P, S, A, M, and SCENE Modes Only) Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to +1EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections. Press the M (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed. In general, choose positive values to make the main subject brighter, negative values to make it darker. Control panel ±0 EV M (Y) button Sub-command dial Information display –0.3 (–1/3) EV +1.0 EV A Live View In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor. 151 At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be displayed after you release the M (Y) button. The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the M (Y) button. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Except in SCENE mode, flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in SCENE mode, flash compensation will be reset when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ). A Optional Flash Units The flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to the flash compensation selected with the camera. A See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278). For information on choosing how flash and exposure compensation combine, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 283). For information on automatically varying flash level over a series of shots, see page 197. 152 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. To use FV lock: 1 Assign FV lock to a camera control. Select FV lock as the “Press” option for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button, 0 284), f3 (Assign preview button, 0 285), or f4 (Assign AE-L/ AF-L button, 0 285). 2 Raise the flash. In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash can be raised by pressing the M (Y) button. In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and g modes, the flash will pop up automatically when required. M (Y) button 3 Focus. Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. 153 4 Lock flash level. After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed, press the button selected in Step 1. The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and an FV lock icon (e) will appear in the display. 5 Recompose the photograph. 6 Take the photograph. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock. 7 Release FV lock. Press the button selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icon (e) is no longer displayed. A Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 283). Note that when commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3, you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA. 154 A Metering When FV lock is used with the built-in flash and no additional flash units, the camera meters a 4 mm circle in the center of the frame. When the built-in flash is used with optional flash units (Advanced Wireless Lighting), the camera meters the entire frame. 155 Remote Control Photography Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control The optional ML-L3 remote control (0 319) can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. 1 Select Remote control mode (ML-L3). Highlight Remote control mode (ML-L3) in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 2 Choose a remote control mode. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Shutter is released 2 s after ML-L3 shutter% Delayed remote release button is pressed. $ & 7 Quick-response Shutter is released when ML-L3 shutter-release remote button is pressed. Press ML-L3 shutter-release button once to Remote raise mirror, again to release shutter and take mirror-up photograph. Prevents blur caused by camera moving when mirror is raised. The shutter can not be released using the Off ML-L3. 3 Frame the photograph. Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface. 156 4 Take the photograph. From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less, aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at either of the infrared receivers on the camera (0 2, 4) and press the ML-L3 shutter-release button. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the selftimer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released. In remote mirror-up mode, pressing the ML-L3 shutter-release button once raises the mirror; the shutter will be released and the self-timer lamp will flash after 30 s or when the button is pressed a second time. A Release Mode When an optional ML-L3 remote control is used, the release mode selected with the release mode dial (0 66) is ignored in favor of the option selected for Remote control mode (ML-L3) in the photo shooting menu. D Before Using Optional ML-L3 Remote Controls Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator sheet. 157 A Using the Built-in Flash Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes (0 146), press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the flash-ready indicator (M) to be displayed (0 36). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the flash has charged. In auto pop-up modes (0 144), the flash will begin charging when remote control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically pop up and fire when required. In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp which lights for one second before the shutter is released. A Focusing in Remote Control Mode The camera will not adjust focus continuously when continuous-servo autofocus is selected; note however that regardless of the autofocus mode selected, you can focus by pressing the camera shutter-release button halfway before shooting. If auto- or single-servo autofocus is selected or the camera is in live view in delayed or quick-response remote mode, the camera will automatically adjust focus before shooting; if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder photography, it will return to stand-by without releasing the shutter. A Remote Mirror-up Mode While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed. 158 A Exiting Remote Control Mode Remote control is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken before the time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 279), Off is selected for Remote control mode (ML-L3), a two-button reset is performed (0 194), or shooting options are reset using Reset photo shooting menu (0 268). D Assign Shutter Button If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288), the ML-L3 can not be used when the live view selector is rotated to 1. A Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in photographs or interfering with exposure, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 70). A See Also For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand-by mode waiting for a signal from the remote control, see Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration (ML-L3); 0 279). For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the remote control is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 280). 159 Wireless Remote Controllers When the camera is used with optional WR-1 and WR-R10/ WR-T10 (0 319) wireless remote controllers, the shutter-release buttons on the WR-1 and WR-T10 perform the same functions as the camera shutter-release button, allowing remote continuous and self-timer photography. WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers The WR-1 can function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is used in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1 can be connected to the accessory terminal for use as a receiver, allowing camera settings to be changed or the shutter to be released remotely by another WR-1 acting as a transmitter. WR-R10/WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers When a WR-R10 (transceiver) is connected to the camera, the shutter can be released using a WR-T10 (transmitter). 160 Recording and Viewing Movies Recording Movies Movies can be recorded in live view. 1 Rotate the live view selector to 1. A Aperture Selection (Modes A and M) In modes A and M, choose an aperture before pressing the a button to start live view. Live view selector 2 Press the a button. The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor as it would appear in the actual movie, modified for the effects of exposure. The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder. a button A The 0 Icon A 0 icon (0 165) indicates that movies can not be recorded. 161 3 Focus. Frame the opening shot and focus (press the X/T button to zoom in for precise focus as described on page 38; for more information on focusing during movie recording, see page 83). Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-priority AF drops during movie recording. A Exposure The exposure settings available vary with the shooting mode: — — ✔ — ISO sensitivity (0 275) — — ✔ — — — Shutter speed P, S A M SCENE, % Other shooting modes Exposure compensation Metering ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — In mode M, shutter speed can be set to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate; 0 166). Spot metering is not available. If the result is over- or under-exposed, exit and restart live view. A White Balance In modes P, S, A, and M, white balance can be set at any time by pressing the L (U) button and rotating the main command dial (0 111). 162 4 Start recording. Press the movie-record button to start recording. A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor. Exposure can be locked by pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button Movie-record button (0 107) or altered by up to ±3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV using exposure Recording indicator compensation (0 109). In autofocus mode, the camera can be refocused by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Time remaining A Audio The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording (0 1). Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens during autofocus or vibration reduction. 163 5 End recording. Press the movie-record button again to end recording. Recording will end automatically when the maximum length is reached, or the memory card is full. A Maximum Length The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum recording times, see page 166); note that depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached (0 379). 6 Exit live view. Press the a button to exit live view. 164 The Live View Display: Movies q w e r ui o t y Description 0 Indicates that movies can not be recorded. — Volume of audio output to headphones. Headphone volume Displayed when third-party headphones 193 are connected. Microphone 192, Microphone sensitivity. sensitivity 273 Sound level for audio recording. Displayed in red if level is too high; adjust — Sound level microphone sensitivity accordingly. 192, Frequency response The current frequency response. 274 Wind noise Displayed when wind noise reduction is 192, reduction on. 274 Time remaining The recording time available for movies. 163 (movie live view) Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording. 166 Highlight display Appears when highlight display is enabled. 193 indicator Item q “No movie” icon w e r t y u i o 165 Maximum Length The maximum length varies with the options selected for Movie quality and Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu (0 273) as shown below. Movie quality Frame size/frame rate * Maximum length v 1920 × 1080; 60p w 1920 × 1080; 50p o 1920 × 1080; 30p High quality p 1920 × 1080; 25p q 1920 × 1080; 24p r 1280 × 720; 60p s 1280 × 720; 50p y 1920 × 1080; 60p z 1920 × 1080; 50p 1 1920 × 1080; 30p Normal 2 1920 × 1080; 25p 3 1920 × 1080; 24p 4 1280 × 720; 60p 5 1280 × 720; 50p Maximum bit rate (Mbps) 10 min. 42 20 min. 24 29 min. 59 s 12 * Listed values. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively. A Frame Size and Rate Settings of 1920×1080; 60p and 1920×1080; 50p are not available for Frame size/frame rate when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area in the movie shooting menu (0 168). These settings can be accessed by setting Image area to 1.3× (18×12). Choosing DX (24×16) for Image area when either of these options is in effect resets Frame size/frame rate to 1920×1080; 30p (if 1920×1080; 60p is selected) or to 1920×1080; 25p (if 1920×1080; 50p is selected). 166 Indices If Index marking is selected as the “Press” option for Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn button, 0 288), g2 (Assign preview button, 0 288), or g3 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 288), you can press the selected button during recording to Pv button add indices that can be used to locate frames during editing and playback (0 178; note that indices can not be added in i mode). Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie. Index A See Also Frame size, frame rate, microphone sensitivity, card slot, and ISO sensitivity options are available in the movie shooting menu (0 273). The roles played by the J, Fn, Pv, and A AE-L/AF-L buttons can be chosen using Custom Settings f1 (OK button; 0 284), g1 (Assign Fn button; 0 288), g2 (Assign preview button; 0 288), and g3 (Assign AE-L/ AF-L button, 0 288), respectively (the last three options also allow you to lock exposure without having to keep a button pressed). Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button; 0 288) controls whether the shutter-release button can be used to start live view or to start and end movie recording. 167 Image Area Selecting 1.3× (18×12) for Image area in the movie shooting menu (0 274) reduces the angle of view and increases the apparent focal length of the lens. Note that movies recorded at the same frame size but with different image areas may not have the same resolution. DX (24×16) 168 1.3× (18×12) Taking Photos in Movie Mode If Take photos is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288) and live view is enabled with the live view selector is rotated to 1, photographs can be taken at any time by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down. If movie recording is in progress, recording will end and the footage recorded to that point will be saved. The photograph will be recorded at the current image area setting using a crop with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9. Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality in the photo shooting menu (0 77, 268). Note that exposure for photographs can not be previewed while the live view selector is rotated to 1; for accurate results when shooting in mode M, rotate the selector to C, adjust exposure, and then rotate the selector back to 1 and start live view. Check the image area before recording. A Image Size The following sizes are available: Image size Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.) * Large 6000 × 3368 50.8 × 28.5/20.0 × 11.2 DX (24×16) Medium 4496 × 2528 38.1 × 21.4/15.0 × 8.4 Small 2992 × 1680 25.3 × 14.2/10.0 × 5.6 Large 4800 × 2696 40.6 × 22.8/16.0 × 9.0 1.3× (18×12) Medium 3600 × 2024 30.5 × 17.1/12.0 × 6.7 Small 2400 × 1344 20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5 *Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm). Image area 169 A HDMI To use live view when the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, select Off for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 292). A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1, the shutterrelease buttons on optional wireless remote controllers (0 160, 319) and remote cords (0 319) can be used to start live view and to start and end movie recording. D Recording Movies Movies are recorded in the sRGB color space. Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see Flicker reduction, 0 290). Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source. Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry. Flash lighting can not be used. Recording ends automatically if the mode dial is rotated. 170 Time-Lapse Photography (i, j, P, S, A, M, and SCENE Modes Only) The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie at the frame size and rate currently selected in the movie shooting menu (0 273). For information on the image area used for time-lapse movies, see page 168. A Before Shooting Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure preview) and view the results in the monitor. For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than auto (0 111). Once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure (0 70). Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery. 1 Select Time-lapse photography. Highlight Time-lapse photography in the movie shooting menu and press 2 to display time-lapse photography settings. 171 2 Adjust time-lapse photography settings. Choose an interval, total shooting time, and exposure smoothing option. • To choose the interval between frames: Highlight Interval and press 2. Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed (minutes and seconds) and press J. • To choose the total shooting time: Highlight Shooting time and press 2. 172 Choose shooting time (up to 7 hours 59 minutes) and press J. • To enable or disable exposure smoothing: Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). 3 Start shooting. Highlight Start and press J. Timelapse photography starts after about 3 s. The camera takes photographs at the selected interval for the selected shooting time. When complete, timelapse movies are recorded to the memory card selected for Destination in movie shooting menu (0 273). 173 ❚❚ Ending Time-Lapse Photography To end time-lapse photography before all the photos are taken, highlight Off in the time-lapse photography menu and press J, or press J between frames or immediately after a frame is recorded. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where time-lapse photography ended. Note that timelapse photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory card is ejected. ❚❚ No Photograph The camera will skip the current frame if it is unable to focus using single-servo autofocus (AF-S or single-servo autofocus selected for AF-A; note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next frame. D Time-Lapse Photography Time-lapse is not available in live view (0 31, 161), at a shutter speed of A or % (0 58), when bracketing (0 197), High Dynamic Range (HDR, 0 141), multiple exposure (0 211), or interval timer photography (0 217) is active. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie can not be recorded at current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than the shooting time). Time-lapse photography may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where time-lapse photography ended. 174 A Calculating the Length of the Final Movie The total number of frames in the final movie can be approximated by dividing the shooting time by the interval and rounding up. The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the number of shots by the frame rate selected for Frame size/frame rate in movie shooting menu (0 166, 273). A 48 frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be about two seconds long. The maximum length for movies recorded using timelapse photography is 20 minutes. Length recorded/ maximum length Memory card indicator Frame size/ frame rate A During Shooting During time-lapse photography, the memory card access lamp will light and the time-lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the control panel. The time remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in the shutter-speed display immediately before each frame is recorded. At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279), the standby timer will not expire during shooting. To view current time-lapse photography settings or end time-lapse photography, press the G button between shots. 175 A Image Review The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 267). Other playback operations can not be performed while the frame is displayed. A Flash Photography To use the flash during time-lapse photography, select mode P, S, A, or M and press the M (Y) button to raise the flash before shooting begins. A Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot at each interval. The self-timer can not be used. A See Also For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse photography is complete, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 280). 176 Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 229). Press J to start playback; your current position is indicated by the movie progress bar. 1 icon Length Current position/total length Movie progress bar Volume Guide The following operations can be performed: To Use Pause Play Rewind/ advance Description Pause playback. J Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/advance. Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is indicated by h in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i). If playback is paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time; keep pressed for continuous rewind or advance. 177 To Use Description Skip 10 s Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s. Skip ahead/ back Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to next or previous index, or to skip to the last or first frame if the movie contains no indices. Adjust volume Trim movie Exit Return to shooting mode X (T)/ Press X (T) to increase volume, W (S) W (S) to decrease. See page 179 for more information. i K/ Exit to full-frame playback. Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. A The p Icon Movies with indices (0 167) are indicated by a p icon in full-frame playback. 178 Editing Movies Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills. Option 9 Choose start/end point 4 Save selected frame Description Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed. Save a selected frame as a JPEG still. Trimming Movies To create trimmed copies of movies: 1 Display a movie full frame (0 229). 2 Pause the movie on the new opening frame. Play the movie back as described on page 177, pressing J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause and pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the main Movie progress bar or sub-command dial to locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame. 179 3 Select Choose start/end point. Press the i button. i button Highlight Choose start/end point. 4 Select Start point. To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press J. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9. Start point 180 5 Confirm the new start point. If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial one stop; to skip to an index, or to the first or last frame if the movie contains no indices, rotate the sub-command dial). 6 Choose the end point. Press L (U) to switch from the start point (w) to the end point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in L (U) button Step 9. End point 7 Create the copy. Once the desired closing frame is displayed, press 1. 181 8 Preview the movie. To preview the copy, highlight Preview and press J (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described on the foregoing pages, highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9. 9 Save the copy. Highlight Save as new file and press J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite existing file and press J. A Trimming Movies Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card. Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original. A Removing Opening or Closing Footage To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to Step 7 without pressing the L (U) button in Step 6. To remove only the closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the L (U) button in Step 6. A The Retouch Menu Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option in the retouch menu (0 296). 182 Saving Selected Frames To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still: 1 Pause the movie on the desired frame. Play the movie back as described on page 177, pressing J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause. Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy. 2 Choose Save selected frame. Press the i button, then highlight Save selected frame and press J. i button 3 Create a still copy. Press 1 to create a still copy of the current frame. 183 4 Save the copy. Highlight Yes and press J to create a fine-quality (0 77) JPEG copy of the selected frame. A Save Selected Frame JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 234). 184 Other Shooting Options The R Button (Viewfinder Photography) Pressing the R button during viewfinder photography displays shooting information in the monitor including shutter speed, aperture, number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode. R button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shooting mode ................................6 Flexible program indicator ......... 52 Flash sync indicator....................282 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56 Aperture stop indicator...... 54, 308 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56 Aperture (number of stops) ..................................... 54, 308 7 Exposure indicator ....................... 57 Exposure compensation display.......................................... 109 Bracketing progress indicator Exposure and flash bracketing........................... 198 WB bracketing....................... 203 8 Active D-Lighting indicator...... 140 9 Picture Control indicator........... 131 185 The Information Display (Continued) 25 24 23 22 21 10 11 12 13 20 19 18 10 White balance..............................112 White balance fine-tuning indicator.......................................115 11 HDR indicator...............................142 HDR strength ...............................142 Multiple exposure indicator.....214 12 “Beep” indicator ..........................280 13 “k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures)..................................... 27 14 Image comment indicator........291 15 Copyright information...............291 16 “Clock not set” indicator ...........188 17 16 15 14 17 Image quality ................................ 78 Role played by card in slot 2 ...... 82 18 Image size....................................... 81 19 Autofocus mode ........................... 83 20 Pv button assignment ............... 285 21 Release mode ............................ 8, 66 Continuous shooting speed....... 67 22 Image area indicator.................... 74 23 Metering ....................................... 105 24 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator ...................................... 198 WB bracketing indicator ........... 203 ADL bracketing indicator.......... 207 25 ADL bracketing amount............ 208 A Turning the Monitor Off To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button again or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds. 186 The Information Display (Continued) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 43 42 41 35 40 36 39 38 37 26 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 252 36 Number of exposures Eye-Fi connection indicator ..... 293 remaining ......................................27 Time-lapse recording 27 Satellite signal indicator ........... 228 indicator ...................................... 175 28 Long exposure noise reduction indicator ...................................... 271 37 Fn button assignment ............... 284 29 Vignette control indicator ........ 271 38 AE-L/AF-L button assignment ... 285 30 Auto distortion control ............. 271 39 AF-area mode indicator...............86 31 Exposure delay mode................ 280 40 Flash mode ......................... 144, 146 32 Interval timer indicator ............. 217 41 FV lock indicator ......................... 154 Time-lapse indicator.................. 171 42 Flash compensation Remote control mode indicator ...................................... 151 (ML-L3)......................................... 156 Flash compensation value ....... 151 33 MB-D15 battery type display... 281 43 Exposure compensation MB-D15 battery indicator......... 319 indicator ...................................... 110 Exposure compensation 34 Camera battery indicator......22, 26 value............................................. 109 35 ISO sensitivity indicator ............ 100 ISO sensitivity .............................. 100 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...................................... 103 Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes. 187 A See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 279). For information on changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see Custom Setting d9 (Information display, 0 281). A The Y (“Clock Not Set”) Icon The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC adapter (0 319). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months. If a Y icon flashes in the information display, the clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct. Use the Time zone and date > Date and time option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date (0 290). 188 The i Button For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button. Highlight items and press 2 to view options, then highlight the desired option and press J to select. To exit the i-button menu and return to the shooting display, press the i button i button. Viewfinder photography i-button menu Live view i-button menu (live view selector rotated to C) i-button menu (live view selector rotated to 1) 189 The i-Button Menu (Viewfinder Photography) Pressing the i button during viewfinder photography displays a menu with the following options: Option Description Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12) Image area image areas (0 73). Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (0 130). Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 139). The camera combines two photographs taken at HDR (high dynamic different exposures to enhance details in highlights range) and shadows (0 141). Remote control Choose a remote control mode (0 156). mode (ML-L3) Choose the role played by the Fn button (0 284), Assign Fn button either by itself (Press) or when used in combination with the command dials (Press + command dials). Choose the role played by the Pv button (0 285), Assign preview either by itself (Press) or when used in combination button with the command dials (Press + command dials). Choose the role played by the A AE-L/ AF-L button Assign AE-L/AF-L (0 285), either by itself (Press) or when used in button combination with the command dials (Press + command dials). Reduces noise (bright spots or fog) at slow shutter Long exposure NR speeds (0 271). Reduces noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels) that High ISO NR tends to occur as ISO sensitivity increases (0 271). 190 The i-Button Menu (Live View) The options available in the live view i-button menu vary with the position of the live view selector. If the live view selector is rotated to C, the i-button menu will contain the items listed below. Option Description Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12) Image area image areas (0 73). Image quality Choose image quality (0 77). Image size Choose image size (0 81). Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (0 130). Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 139). Remote control Choose a remote control mode (0 156). mode (ML-L3) Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness for live view (note that this affects live view only and has no effect on photographs or Monitor movies or on the brightness brightness of the monitor for menus or playback; to adjust the brightness of the monitor for menus and playback without affecting live view, use the Monitor brightness option in the setup menu (0 289)). 191 If the live view selector is rotated to 1, the i-button menu will contain the items listed below. Microphone sensitivity, Frequency response, Wind noise reduction, and Highlight display can be adjusted while recording is in progress. Option Image area Frame size/ frame rate Movie quality Microphone sensitivity Description Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12) image areas (0 168). Select a frame size and rate (0 166). Choose movie quality (0 166). Press 1 or 3 to adjust microphone sensitivity. Both the built-in and optional stereo microphones are affected. Control the frequency response of the built-in microphone or optional stereo microphones (0 274). Enable or disable wind noise reduction using the built-in microphone’s low-cut filter (0 274). Choose a Picture Control (0 130). The Clarity Set Picture Control parameter does not apply to movies. When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose Destination the card to which movies are recorded (0 273). Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness for live view (note that this affects Monitor live view only and has no brightness effect on photographs or movies or on the brightness of the monitor for menus or playback; 0 191). Frequency response Wind noise reduction 192 Option Description Choose whether the brightest areas of the frame (highlights) are shown by Highlight display slanting lines in the live view display. To access this option, select mode P, S, A, or M. Highlights Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume. Headphone volume A Using an External Microphone The optional stereo microphone can be used to record sound in stereo or to avoid recording focus noise and other sounds made by the lens (0 319). A Headphones Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may result in high volume; particular care should be taken when headphones are used. 193 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the W (S) and E buttons down together for more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green dot). The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset. E button W (S) button ❚❚ Menu Options Option Image quality Image size White balance Fine tuning Picture Control settings 1 HDR (high dynamic range) ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity P, S, A, M Other modes Hi ISO command dial access Auto ISO sensitivity control Remote control mode (ML-L3) Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting Exposure delay mode 194 Default JPEG normal Large Auto > Normal A-B: 0, G-M: 0 Unmodified Off 2 100 Auto Off Off Off Off 3 Off 4 Off 0 77 81 111 114 130 141 99 101 102 156 211 217 280 1 Current Picture Control only. 2 HDR strength is not reset. 3 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and number of shots are not reset. 4 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting time, shooting interval, number of intervals and shots, and exposure smoothing are not reset. ❚❚ Other Settings Option Autofocus (viewfinder) Autofocus mode % Other modes AF-area mode n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3 m, w i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, g, u, P, S, A, M Autofocus (live view) Autofocus mode AF-area mode m, r, w, %, g, u, 1, 2, 3, P, S, A, M n, 0 i, j, k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, z Focus point 1 Highlight display Headphone volume Metering AE lock hold Bracketing Default 0 AF-S AF-A 83 Single-point AF 51-point dynamic-area AF 86 Auto-area AF AF-S Wide-area AF Normal-area AF Face-priority AF Center Off 15 Matrix Off Off 2 84 88 89 193 193 105 93, 107 197 195 Option Default 0 Flash compensation Off 151 Exposure compensation Off 109 Flash mode i, k, p, n, w, g Auto s Auto+red-eye reduction 145, 147 o Auto+slow sync 0, P, S, A, M Fill flash FV lock Off 153 Flexible program Off 52 + NEF (RAW) Off 79 1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode. 2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1 EV (exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs. 196 Bracketing (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 149, 283, and 313), white balance, or Active D-Lighting and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. ❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs. Exposure modified by: 0 EV Exposure modified by: –1 EV Exposure modified by: +1 EV 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing. Select Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set) in the Custom Settings menu, highlight an option, and press J. Choose AE & flash to vary both exposure and flash level, AE only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to vary only flash level. 197 2 Choose the number of shots. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. Number of shots BKT button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator Information display At settings other than zero, a M icon is displayed in the control panel. Viewfinder D appears in the viewfinder, while the information display provides a bracketing indicator and an icon showing the type of bracketing: v (exposure and flash bracketing), w (exposure bracketing only), or x (flash bracketing only). A Live View In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor. 198 3 Select an exposure increment. Pressing the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure increment. Exposure increment BKT button Sub-command dial Information display At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV. The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are listed below. Information display No. of shots 0 3 3 2 2 3 5 7 9 Bracketing order (EVs) 0 0/+0.3/+0.7 0/–0.7/–0.3 0/+0.3 0/–0.3 0/–0.3/+0.3 0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7 0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7/+1.0 0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7/ +1.0/+1.3 Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5. 199 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation (see page 109). A bracketing progress indicator is displayed while bracketing is in effect. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot. No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7 Display after first shot A See Also For information on choosing the size of the increment, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278). For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see Custom Setting e7 (Bracketing order, 0 284). 200 ❚❚ Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated. A Zero Shots The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. A Exposure and Flash Bracketing In continuous release modes (0 66), shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 198 each time the shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Selftimer) > Number of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on. 201 A Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 102) in modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed. ❚❚ White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white balance. For more information on white balance, see page 111. 1 Select white balance bracketing. Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set). 202 2 Choose the number of shots. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. Number of shots BKT button Main command dial WB bracketing indicator Information display At settings other than zero, M and D are displayed respectively in the Viewfinder control panel and viewfinder; a y icon and a bracketing indicator appear in the information display. A Live View In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor. 203 3 Select a white balance increment. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose from increments of 1, 2, or 3 (respectively equivalent to approximately 5, 10, or 15 mired). The B value indicates the amount of blue, the A value the amount of amber (0 114). White balance increment BKT button Sub-command dial Information display The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below. Information display 204 No. of shots 2 2 3 White balance increment 1B 1A 1 A, 1 B Bracketing order 0/1 B 0/1 A 0/1 A/1 B 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance finetuning. If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining, n and the icon for the affected card will flash in the control panel, a flashing j icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at right, and the shutter release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted. 205 ❚❚ Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated. A Zero Shots The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. A White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing. White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 114). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis. In self-timer mode (0 69), the number of copies specified in the whitebalance program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 279). If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded. 206 ❚❚ ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 139. 1 Select ADL bracketing. Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set). 2 Choose the number of shots. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. ADL bracketing amount BKT button Main command dial Number of shots Information display At settings other than zero, M and D are displayed respectively in the Viewfinder control panel and viewfinder; a z icon and the bracketing amount appear in the information display. 207 Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High (four shots), or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra high (five shots). If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4. 3 Select Active D-Lighting. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose Active D-Lighting. BKT button Sub-command dial Active D-Lighting is shown in the information display and control panel. Active D-Lighting Y Auto R Low Q Normal P High Z Extra high 208 Information display Control panel display 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-byshot according to the bracketing program selected. A bracketing progress indicator is displayed while bracketing is in effect. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot. No. shots: 3 Display after first shot A Live View In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor. 209 ❚❚ Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated. A Zero Shots The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the bracketing sequence. A ADL Bracketing In continuous release modes (0 66), shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 207 each time the shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Selftimer) > Number of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on. 210 Multiple Exposure (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three NEF (RAW) exposures in a single photograph. ❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s. A Extended Recording Times If the monitor turns off during playback or menu operations and no operations are performed for about 30 s, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. The time available to record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279). 1 Select Multiple exposure. Highlight Multiple exposure in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 211 2 Select a mode. Highlight Multiple exposure mode and press 2. Highlight one of the following and press J. • To take a series of multiple exposures, select 6 On (series). Multiple exposure shooting will continue until you select Off for Multiple exposure mode. • To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single multiple exposure. • To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off. If On (series) or On (single photo) is selected, a n icon will be displayed in the control panel. 212 3 Choose the number of shots. Highlight Number of shots and press 2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press J. 4 Choose the amount of gain. Highlight Auto gain and press 2. The following options will be displayed. Highlight an option and press J. • On: Gain is adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures). • Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure. 213 5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. In continuous release modes (0 66), the camera records all exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first photograph. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3 on page 213, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other release modes, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page 215). The n icon will flash until shooting ends. If On (series) is selected, multiple exposure shooting will only end when Off is selected for multiple exposure mode; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure is complete. The n icon clears from the display when multiple exposure shooting ends. 214 ❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode. If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if: • A two-button reset is performed (0 194) • The camera is turned off • The battery is exhausted • Pictures are deleted 215 D Multiple Exposures Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure. Live view is not available while shooting is in progress. Selecting live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off. The shooting information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering, exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the multiple exposure. A Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will also end automatically). A Other Settings While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be changed. 216 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals. D Before Shooting Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) and MUP when using the interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor. Once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure (0 70). Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date (0 290). Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available separately). 1 Select Interval timer shooting. Highlight Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu and press 2 to display interval timer settings. 217 2 Adjust interval timer settings. Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval, and exposure smoothing option. • To choose a start option: Highlight Start options and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start day and start time, then choose the date and time and press J. • To choose the interval between shots: Highlight Interval and press 2. 218 Choose an interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) and press J. • To choose the number of shots per interval: Highlight No. of intervals × shots/interval and press 2. Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval and press J. In S (single frame) mode, the photographs for each interval will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 (Continuous low-speed, 0 280). • To enable or disable exposure smoothing: Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). 219 3 Start shooting. Highlight Start and press J. The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Start options in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. A During Shooting During interval timer photography, the memory card access lamp will flash. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining, and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current Memory card interval. At other times, the number of access lamp intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer expires). Settings can be adjusted, the menus used, and pictures played back while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval. Note that changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause shooting to end. A Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval. 220 ❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by pressing J or selecting Pause in the interval timer menu. ❚❚ Resuming Interval Timer Shooting To resume shooting: Starting Now Highlight Restart and press J. Starting at a Specified Time For Start options, highlight Choose start day and start time and press 2. Choose a starting date and time and press J. Highlight Restart and press J. ❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting To end interval timer photography before all the photos are taken, select Off in the interval timer menu. 221 ❚❚ No Photograph The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or the camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected in AF-A (note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next interval. D Out of Memory If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 221) after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card. A Interval Timer Photography Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected number of shots. If the interval is too short, the number of photos taken may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of intervals multiplied by the number of shots per interval). Interval timer photography can not be combined with long time-exposures (bulb or time photography, 0 58) or time-lapse photography (0 171) and is not available in live view (0 31, 161) or when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288). Note that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the next, the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the next may vary. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of A or % is currently selected in manual exposure mode, the interval is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor. Interval timer shooting will pause when E (self-timer) or MUP mode is selected or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval timer photography). Pausing shooting does not affect interval timer settings. 222 A Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program. 223 Non-CPU Lenses Non-CPU lenses can be used in modes A and M, with aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain access to the following CPU lens functions. If the focal length of the lens is known: • Power zoom can be used with optional flash units • Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display If the maximum aperture of the lens is known: • The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder • Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit supports AA (auto aperture) mode • Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens: • Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses) • Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted. 224 The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter or edit data for a non-CPU lens: 1 Select Non-CPU lens data. Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu and press 2. 2 Choose a lens number. Highlight Lens number and press 4 or 2 to choose a lens number. 3 Enter the focal length and aperture. Highlight Focal length (mm) or Maximum aperture and press 4 or 2 to edit the highlighted item. 4 Save settings and exit. Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number. A Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens. 225 To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens: 1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control. Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press + command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu. Non-CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f2, Assign Fn button, 0 284), the Pv button (Custom Setting f3, Assign preview button, 0 285), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f4, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285). 2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number. Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel. Focal length Maximum aperture Lens number Fn button 226 Main command dial Control panel Location Data The GP-1/GP-1A GPS unit (available separately) can be connected to the camera’s accessory terminal (0 2) using the cable supplied with the GP-1/GP-1A, allowing information on the camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken. Turn the camera off before connecting the GP-1/ GP-1A; for more information, see the GP-1/GP-1A manual. ❚❚ Setup Menu Options The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options listed below. • Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when the GP-1/GP-1A is attached. Option Enable Disable Description Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279; to allow the camera time to acquire location data, the delay is extended by up to one minute after the exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the drain on the battery. Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP-1/GP-1A is connected. • Position: This item is only available if the GP-1/GP-1A is connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the GP-1/GP-1A. • Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device. 227 A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock. A The o Icon Connection status is shown by the o icon: • o (static): The camera has established communication with GP-1/ GP-1A. Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is displayed includes an additional page of location data (0 241). • o (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching for a signal. Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include location data. • No icon: No new location data have been received from the GP-1/ GP-1A for at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the o icon is not displayed do not include location data. Information display 228 Shooting display More on Playback Viewing Pictures Full-Frame Playback To play photographs back, press the K button. The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor. K button To Use View additional photographs Press 1 or 3 to view information about current photograph (0 234). View photo information Return to shooting mode Play movie Description Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view photographs in reverse order. K/ J Press the K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. If current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a movie, pressing J starts movie playback (0 177). 229 A Rotate Tall To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0 267). A Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 267), photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the current series displayed. 230 Thumbnail Playback To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W (S) button. W (S) W (S) X (T) X (T) Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback To Use Highlight images View highlighted image Return to shooting mode J K/ Calendar playback Description Use multi selector to highlight images for full-frame playback, playback zoom (0 243), deletion (0 246), or protection (0 245). Press J to display the highlighted image full frame. Press the K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. 231 Calendar Playback To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (S) button when 72 images are displayed. Date list W (S) W (S) X (T) X (T) Thumbnail list Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback Calendar playback The operations that can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list: To Use Toggle between date list and thumbnail list W (S)/J Exit to thumbnail playback/Zoom in on highlighted photo X (T) Highlight dates/ Highlight images • Date list: Highlight date. • Thumbnail list: Highlight picture. Toggle full frame playback Return to shooting mode 232 Description Press W (S) or J button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail list. Press W (S) again to return to date list. • Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback. • Thumbnail list: Press and hold X (T) button to zoom in on highlighted picture. J K/ Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture. Press the K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. The i Button Pressing the i button during full-frame or thumbnail playback displays the options listed below. • Playback slot and folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card, then highlight a folder and press J to i button view the pictures in the highlighted folder. • Retouch (photographs only): Use the options in the retouch menu (0 294) to create a retouched copy of the current photograph. • Edit movie (movies only): Edit movies using the options in the edit movie menu (0 179). Movies can also be edited by pressing the i button when movie playback is paused. • Select to send to smart device/deselect: Select photos for upload to a smart device (0 263). To exit the i-button menu and return to playback, press the i button again. 233 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options (0 266). Location data are only displayed if a GP-1/GP-1A was used when the photo was taken (0 227). File information 234 None (image only) Overview data Highlights Location data RGB histogram Shooting data ❚❚ File Information 12 34 5 14 13 12 6 7 11 10 9 8 Protect status...............................245 8 Image size....................................... 81 Retouch indicator .......................294 9 Image area ..................................... 73 Upload marking ..........................263 10 Time of recording ................ 24, 290 Focus point 1, 2 ................................ 89 11 Date of recording................. 24, 290 AF area brackets 1 .......................... 33 12 Current card slot ........................... 82 Frame number/total number of 13 Folder name................................. 268 frames 14 File name ...................................... 268 7 Image quality................................. 77 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 266) and selected photograph was taken using viewfinder. 2 If photograph was taken using AF-S or with single-servo autofocus selected during AF-A, display shows point where focus first locked. If photograph was taken using AF-C or with continuous-servo autofocus selected during AF-A, focus point is only displayed if option other than auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 235 ❚❚ Highlights 1 2 3 * 1 Image highlights 2 Folder number—frame number ........................................ 268 3 Current channel * *Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for the current channel. Hold W (S) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows: W (S) button RGB (all channels) 236 R (red) G (green) B (blue) ❚❚ RGB Histogram 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 Image highlights * 2 Folder number—frame number ........................................268 3 White balance..............................111 Color temperature................117 White balance fine-tuning..........................114 Preset manual........................120 4 Current channel * 5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical axis number of pixels. 6 Histogram (red channel) 7 Histogram (green channel) 8 Histogram (blue channel) *Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for the current channel. Hold W (S) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows: W (S) button RGB (all channels) R (red) G (green) B (blue) Highlight display off 237 A Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, press X (T). Use the X (T) and W (S) buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor. A Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below: If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even. If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the left. If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the right. Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor. 238 ❚❚ Shooting Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 Metering .......................................105 7 Flash type ............................ 144, 311 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56 Commander mode..................... 283 Aperture....................................54, 56 8 Flash mode.......................... 145, 147 2 Shooting mode ................................6 9 Flash control .............. 149, 283, 313 ISO sensitivity 1 .............................. 99 Flash compensation................... 151 3 Exposure compensation ...........109 10 Camera name Optimal exposure tuning 2 .......278 11 Image area ..................................... 73 4 Focal length.........................224, 310 12 Folder number—frame 5 Lens data.......................................224 number ........................................ 268 6 Focus mode..............................83, 97 Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3 13 14 15 13 White balance..............................111 14 Color space................................... 270 Color temperature................117 15 Picture Control 4 .......................... 130 White balance fine-tuning....114 Preset manual........................120 239 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 High ISO noise reduction.......... 271 19 Vignette control.......................... 271 Long exposure noise 20 Retouch history........................... 294 reduction..................................... 271 21 Image comment ......................... 291 17 Active D-Lighting ....................... 139 18 HDR strength ............................... 141 22 23 22 Name of photographer 5 ........... 291 23 Copyright holder 5 ...................... 291 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on. 2 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 278) has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method. 3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached. 4 Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected. 5 The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph using the Copyright information option in the setup menu. 240 ❚❚ Location Data * (0 227) 1 2 3 4 1 Latitude 2 Longitude * Data for movies are for start of recording. 3 Altitude 4 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) 241 ❚❚ Overview Data 1 2 345 6 17 18 19 20 21 7 8 29 28 9 16 27 22 23 26 25 24 15 141312 11 10 1 Frame number/total number of 16 Current card slot ............................82 images 17 Metering....................................... 105 2 Upload marking.......................... 263 18 Shooting mode................................ 6 3 Protect status............................... 245 19 Shutter speed.......................... 53, 56 4 Retouch indicator ....................... 294 20 Aperture ................................... 54, 56 5 Camera name 21 ISO sensitivity * ...............................99 6 Image comment indicator ....... 291 22 Focal length ........................ 224, 310 7 Location data indicator ............. 227 23 Active D-Lighting ....................... 139 8 Histogram showing the 24 Picture Control ............................ 130 distribution of tones in the image 25 Color space .................................. 270 (0 238). 26 Flash mode ......................... 145, 147 9 Image quality .................................77 27 White balance ............................. 111 10 Image size........................................81 Color temperature ............... 117 11 Image area ......................................73 White balance fine-tuning ... 114 Preset manual ....................... 120 12 File name ...................................... 268 13 Time of recording .................24, 290 28 Flash compensation .................. 151 Commander mode..................... 283 14 Folder name................................. 268 15 Date of recording..................24, 290 29 Exposure compensation........... 109 * Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on. 242 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback. The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect: X (T) button To Zoom in or out View other areas of image Use Description Press X (T) to zoom in to X (T)/ maximum of W (S) approximately 38× (large images in 24 × 16/DX format), 28× (medium images) or 19× (small images). Press W (S) to zoom out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Bar under navigation window shows zoom ratio; turns green at ratio of 1 : 1. 243 To Use Select faces View other images Return to shooting mode 244 K/ Description Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window. Rotate sub-command dial to view other faces. Rotate main command dial to view same location in other photos at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a movie is displayed. Press the K button or press the shutterrelease button halfway to exit to shooting mode. Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, press the L (U) button to protect the current picture from accidental deletion. Protected files are marked with a P icon and can not be deleted using the O (Q) button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 289). To remove protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or highlight it and press the L (U) button. L (U) button A Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (U) and O (Q) buttons together for about two seconds during playback. 245 Deleting Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O (Q) button. To delete multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted. Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph. 1 Press the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. O (Q) button 2 Press the O (Q) button again. To delete the photograph, press the O (Q) button. To exit without deleting the photograph, press the K button. O (Q) button 246 A Calendar Playback During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O (Q) button (0 232). A See Also The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted (0 267). 247 The Playback Menu The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion. Option Q Selected n Select date R All Description Delete selected pictures. Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 249). Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0 266). If two cards are inserted, you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted. ❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs 1 Select pictures. Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press the W (S) button to select or deselect. Selected pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat as desired to select additional pictures. W (S) button 248 2 Delete the selected pictures. Press J. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J. ❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date 1 Select dates. Highlight a date and press 2 to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date. Selected dates are marked with a M icon. Repeat as desired to select additional dates; to deselect a date, highlight it and press 2. 2 Delete the selected pictures. Press J. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J. 249 Wi-Fi What Wi-Fi Can Do for You The camera can connect via Wi-Fi wireless networks to a compatible smart device (smartphone or tablet) running Nikon’s dedicated Wireless Mobile Utility app (0 263). Download pictures Remote control A Installing the Wireless Mobile Utility App 1 Find the app. On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App Store, or another app marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile Utility”. For more information, see the instructions provided with the smart device. 2 Install the app. Read the app description and install the app. A pdf manual for the Wireless Mobile Utility is available for download at the following URLs: • Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/ • iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/ Android 250 iOS Accessing the Camera Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless Mobile Utility on your compatible Android or iOS smart device. Android and iOS: Connecting via SSID Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device before connecting. For details, see the documentation provided with the smart device. 1 Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi. Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and press 2. Highlight Network connection and press 2, then highlight Enable and press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate. 2 Display the camera SSID. Highlight Network settings and press 2. 251 Highlight View SSID and press 2. 3 Select the camera SSID. On the smart device, choose Settings > Wi-Fi and select the camera SSID to connect via Wi-Fi. 4 Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility. Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. 5 Enable wireless security. The connection will initially be unprotected by passwords or other security features. Enable security using the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device (0 257). A The Wi-Fi Display While Wi-Fi is enabled, a g icon will flash in the display. The icon will stop flashing once a connection has been established and the camera is exchanging data with the smart device. Control panel 252 Monitor D Security Although one of the benefits of a wireless-enabled device is that it allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not enabled: • Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information. • Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled. A Password Protection You may be prompted to enter a password the first time you connect after changing password settings. 253 Android: Connecting via NFC If the smart device supports NFC (Near Field Communication), a Wi-Fi connection can be established simply by touching the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC antenna. Before connecting, enable NFC and Wi-Fi on the smart device as described in the documentation provided with the smart device. 1 Establish a Wi-Fi connection. In viewfinder photography with the standby timer on, touch the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC antenna (for the location of the NFC antenna, see the documentation provided with the smart device). Maintain contact until the camera displays a message stating that an NFC device has been detected and a Wi-Fi connection has been established. The Wireless Mobile Utility will launch automatically. 2 Enable wireless security. The connection will initially be unprotected by passwords or other security features. Enable security using the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device (0 257). 254 D Security Although one of the benefits of a wireless-enabled device is that it allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not enabled: • Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information. • Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled. A NFC NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard for shortrange wireless communications technology. A Wi-Fi Connecting to a smart device via NFC automatically enables the Wi-Fi > Network connection option in the camera setup menu. A No Connection If you are unable to establish a connection using NFC as described above, connect using another method (0 251). A Disabling NFC The NFC option in the setup menu is used to turn NFC on and off. Select Disable to disable NFC connections. 255 Android: Other Wi-Fi Connection Options WPS can be used with compatible smart devices. Wireless security is enabled automatically. ❚❚ Push-Button WPS Adjust settings as follows to connect at the push of a button: • Camera: Select Wi-Fi > Network settings > Push-button WPS in the setup menu. • Smart device: Select WPS button connection in the Wi-Fi settings menu. ❚❚ PIN-Entry WPS To connect to a smart device using a PIN, select Wi-Fi > Network settings > PINentry WPS in the camera setup menu and enter the PIN displayed by the smart device. Restoring Default Settings To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset network settings. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to restore default network settings. A Terminating the Connection Wi-Fi can be disabled by: • Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu • Starting movie recording • Connecting an optional UT-1 communication unit • Turning the camera off 256 Wireless Security Adjust security settings after establishing a Wi-Fi connection. In the case of WPS connections (0 256), security is enabled automatically; no further adjustments to settings are required. ❚❚ Android OS 1 Display Wireless Mobile Utility settings. On the smart device, select the c icon at the top right corner of the display or open the settings menu in the Wireless Mobile Utility home display. 2 Select Wireless Mobile Adapter settings. 257 3 Select Authentication/encryption. 4 Select WPA2-PSK-AES. Select WPA2-PSK-AES and select OK. 5 Select Password. 258 6 Enter a password. Enter a password and select Save. Passwords may be from 8 to 63 characters long. 7 Enable wireless security. Select b. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select OK. A Viewing Wireless Security Settings To view the current password and authentication/encryption settings, select Current settings in the Wireless Mobile Adapter settings menu. 259 ❚❚ iOS 1 Display Wireless Mobile Utility settings. On the smart device, select the c icon in the Wireless Mobile Utility home display. 2 Select WMA settings. 3 Select Authentication. 260 4 Select WPA2-PSK-AES. Select WPA2-PSK-AES. Select WMA settings to return to the WMA settings menu. If you are prompted to enter a password, select OK. 5 Select Password. 6 Enter a password. Enter a password and select WMA settings. Passwords may be from 8 to 63 characters long. 261 7 Enable wireless security. Select Settings. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select OK. The smart device will prompt you for this password the next time you connect to the camera via Wi-Fi. D Wi-Fi Read the warnings on pages xx to xxii before using the Wi-Fi function. To disable Wi-Fi in settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu. Note that Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that the standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on the smart device is communicating with the camera. If no data are exchanged for about 5 minutes, the standby timer will turn off. The camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card is inserted and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected. To prevent loss of power while connected, charge the battery before enabling the network connection. 262 Selecting Pictures for Upload Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart device. Movies can not be selected for upload. Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload 1 Select an image. Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback. 2 Display playback options. Press the i button to display playback options. i button 3 Choose Select to send to smart device/deselect. Highlight Select to send to smart device/deselect and press J. Pictures selected for upload are indicated by a & icon; to deselect, display or highlight the image and repeat Steps 2 and 3. 263 Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload Follow the steps below to change the upload status of multiple pictures. 1 Choose Select to send to smart device. Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu, then highlight Select to send to smart device and press 2. 2 Select pictures. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures and press W (S) to select or deselect. Selected pictures are marked by a & icon. 3 Press J. Press J to complete the operation. Selecting Pictures for Upload via NFC If an NFC connection (0 254) is established during playback, the image currently displayed full frame or highlighted in the thumbnail list or calendar playback is automatically marked for upload. 1 Display or highlight the desired image. Display the picture full frame or highlight it in the thumbnail list or calendar playback. 2 Connect. Touch the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC antenna until the camera displays a message stating that an NFC device has been detected. The picture will be marked with a & icon to show that it has been selected for upload. 264 Downloading Selected Pictures to the Smart Device To download the selected pictures to the smart device, establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera (0 251) and select View photos in the Wireless Mobile Utility. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select OK to start download. Android OS iOS 265 Menu List This section lists the options available in the camera menus. For more information, see the Menu Guide. D The Playback Menu: Managing Images Delete Selected Select date All Playback folder D7200 All Current Hide image Select/set Select date Deselect all Playback display options Basic photo info Focus point Additional photo info None (image only) Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data Overview 266 Delete multiple images (0 248). (defaults to D7200) Choose a folder for playback. Hide or reveal images. Hidden images are displayed only in the “Hide image” menu and cannot be played back. Choose the information available in the playback photo information display (0 234). Copy image(s) Select source Select image(s) Select destination folder Copy image(s)? Image review On Off After delete Show next Show previous Continue as before Rotate tall On Off Slide show Start Image type Frame interval DPOF print order Select/set Deselect all Copy pictures from one memory card to another. This option is only available when two memory cards are inserted in the camera. (defaults to Off) Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting (0 230). (defaults to Show next) Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted. (defaults to On) Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during playback (0 230). View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder. Select images for printing with a DPOFcompatible print service or printer, and choose the number of prints. 267 C The Photo Shooting Menu: Photo Shooting Options Reset photo shooting menu Yes No Storage folder Select folder by number Select folder from list File naming File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 Overflow Backup RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 Image quality NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic NEF (RAW) JPEG fine JPEG normal JPEG basic 268 Select Yes to restore photo shooting menu options to their default values. Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored. Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which photographs are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”. (defaults to Overflow) Choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted in the camera (0 82). (defaults to JPEG normal) Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality, 0 77). Image size Large Medium Small Image area DX (24×16) 1.3× (18×12) JPEG compression Size priority Optimal quality NEF (RAW) recording Type NEF (RAW) bit depth White balance Auto Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy Shade Choose color temp. Preset manual (defaults to Large) Choose the image size, in pixels (0 81). (defaults to DX (24×16)) Choose the image area (0 73). (defaults to Size priority) Choose a compression type for JPEG images (0 80). Choose the type of compression and the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images (0 80). (defaults to Auto) Match white balance to the light source (0 111). 269 Set Picture Control (defaults to Standard) Standard Choose how new photos will be processed. Select according to the type Neutral of scene or your creative intent (0 130). Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape Flat Manage Picture Control Save/edit Create custom Picture Controls (0 135). Rename Delete Load/save Color space (defaults to sRGB) sRGB Choose a color space for photographs. Adobe RGB Active D-Lighting (defaults to Off (modes P, S, A, M, %, g, i, u, 1, 2, and 3) or Auto (other modes)) Auto Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs with Extra high natural contrast (0 139). High Normal Low Off HDR (high dynamic range) HDR mode Preserve details in highlights and shadows when photographing highHDR strength contrast scenes (0 141). 270 Vignette control High Normal Low Off Auto distortion control On Off Long exposure NR On Off High ISO NR High Normal Low Off ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity Hi ISO command dial access Auto ISO sensitivity control (defaults to Normal) Reduce the drop in brightness at the edges of photographs when using type G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded). The effect is most noticeable at maximum aperture. (defaults to Off) Reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses. (defaults to Off) Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photos taken at slow shutter speeds. (defaults to Normal) Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in photos taken at high ISO sensitivities. Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs (0 99, 102). 271 Remote control mode (ML-L3) Delayed remote Quick-response remote Remote mirror-up Off Multiple exposure Multiple exposure mode Number of shots Auto gain Interval timer shooting Start Start options Interval No. of intervals×shots/interval Exposure smoothing 272 (defaults to Off) Choose how the camera behaves when used with an ML-L3 remote control. Record two or three NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph (0 211). Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded (0 217). 1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options Reset movie shooting menu Yes No File naming Destination Slot 1 Slot 2 Frame size/frame rate 1920×1080; 60p 1920×1080; 50p 1920×1080; 30p 1920×1080; 25p 1920×1080; 24p 1280× 720; 60p 1280× 720; 50p Movie quality High quality Normal Microphone sensitivity Auto sensitivity Manual sensitivity Microphone off Select Yes to restore movie shooting menu options to their default values. Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”. (defaults to Slot 1) Choose the slot to which movies are recorded. (defaults to 1920×1080; 30p) Choose movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate (0 166). (defaults to Normal) Choose movie quality (0 166). (defaults to Auto sensitivity) Turn the built-in or optional stereo microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. 273 Frequency response Wide range Vocal range Wind noise reduction On Off Image area DX (24×16) 1.3× (18×12) White balance Same as photo settings Auto Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Cloudy Shade Choose color temp. Preset manual 274 (defaults to Wide range) Choose the frequency response for the built-in microphone and optional stereo microphones. (defaults to Off) Choose whether to enable the built-in microphone’s low-cut filter to reduce wind noise. (defaults to DX (24×16)) Choose the image area (0 168). (defaults to Same as photo settings) Choose the white balance for movies (0 112). Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos. Set Picture Control Same as photo settings Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape Flat Manage Picture Control Save/edit Rename Delete Load/save High ISO NR High Normal Low Off Movie ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity (mode M) Auto ISO control (mode M) Maximum sensitivity Time-lapse photography Start Interval Shooting time Exposure smoothing (defaults to Same as photo settings) Choose a Picture Control for movies (0 130). Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos. Create custom Picture Controls (0 132). (defaults to Normal) Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for movies. The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie (0 171). 275 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings Reset custom settings Yes No a Autofocus a1 AF-C priority selection Release Focus a2 AF-S priority selection Release Focus a3 Focus tracking with lock-on 5 (Long) 4 3 (Normal) 2 1 (Short) Off 276 Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values. (defaults to Release) When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority). (defaults to Focus) When AF-S is selected for viewfinder photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority). (defaults to 3 (Normal)) Choose how continuous-servo autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject (continuous-servo AF takes effect when AF-C is selected for focus mode during viewfinder photography or if the camera selects continuous-servo in AF-A mode). a4 AF activation Shutter/AF-ON AF-ON only a5 Focus point illumination AF point illumination Manual focus mode a6 Focus point wrap-around Wrap No wrap a7 Number of focus points 51 points 11 points a8 Store points by orientation Yes No a9 Built-in AF-assist illuminator On Off (defaults to Shutter/AF-ON) Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If AF-ON only is selected, the camera will not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Enable or disable viewfinder focus point illumination. (defaults to No wrap) Choose whether viewfinder focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another. (defaults to 51 points) Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection in the viewfinder. (defaults to No) Choose whether the viewfinder stores the focus points for vertical and horizontal orientations separately. (defaults to On) Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor. 277 b Metering/exposure b1 ISO sensitivity step value 1/3 step 1/2 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1/3 step 1/2 step b3 Easy exposure compensation On (Auto reset) On Off b4 Center-weighted area 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm Average b5 Fine-tune optimal exposure Yes No 278 (defaults to 1/3 step) Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO sensitivity. (defaults to 1/3 step) Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and bracketing. (defaults to Off) If On (Auto reset) or On is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted in modes P and S by rotating the sub-command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial. (defaults to 8 mm) Choose the size of the area given the most weight in center-weighted metering. If a non-CPU lens is attached, the size of the area is fixed at 8 mm. (defaults to No) Fine-tune exposure for each metering method. Higher values produce brighter exposures, lower values darker exposures. c Timers/AE lock c1 Shutter-release button AE-L On Off c2 Standby timer 4s 6s 10 s 30 s 1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min No limit c3 Self-timer Self-timer delay Number of shots Interval between shots c4 Monitor off delay Playback Menus Information display Image review Live view c5 Remote on duration (ML-L3) 1 min 5 min 10 min 15 min (defaults to Off) Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. (defaults to 6 s) Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed (0 37). Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode. Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed. (defaults to 1 min) Select the length of time the camera will wait for a signal from the remote before cancelling remote control mode (0 156). 279 d Shooting/display d1 Beep Volume Pitch d2 Continuous low-speed 6 fps 5 fps 4 fps 3 fps 2 fps 1 fps d3 Max. continuous release 1–100 d4 Exposure delay mode 3s 2s 1s Off d5 Flash warning On Off d6 File number sequence On Off Reset d7 Viewfinder grid display On Off 280 Choose the pitch and volume of the beep. (defaults to 3 fps) Choose the maximum frame advance rate in CL mode (note that the frame advance rate in live view will not exceed 3.7 fps even when values of 4 fps or faster are selected). (defaults to 100) Choose the maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release mode. (defaults to Off) In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, select 1 s, 2 s, or 3 s to delay shutter release until approximately one, two, or three seconds after the mirror is raised. (defaults to On) If On is selected, the flash-ready indicator (M) will blink if the flash is required to ensure optimal exposure. (defaults to On) Choose how the camera assigns file numbers. (defaults to Off) Choose whether to display a framing grid in the viewfinder. d8 Easy ISO On Off d9 Information display Auto Manual d10 LCD illumination On Off d11 MB-D15 battery type LR6 (AA alkaline) HR6 (AA Ni-MH) FR6 (AA lithium) d12 Battery order Use MB-D15 batteries first Use camera battery first (defaults to Off) If On is selected, ISO sensitivity can be set in modes P and S by rotating the subcommand dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial. (defaults to Auto) Change the appearance of the information display (0 185) for conditions in which the monitor is hard to read (for example, when lighting is too bright or too dark). (defaults to Off) Choose whether the control panel is illuminated while the standby timer is active. (defaults to LR6 (AA alkaline)) To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB-D15 battery pack is used with AA batteries, match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when using EN-EL15 batteries. (defaults to Use MB-D15 batteries first) Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB-D15 battery pack is attached. 281 e Bracketing/flash e1 Flash sync speed 1/320 s (Auto FP) 1/250 s (Auto FP) 1/250 s 1/200 s 1/160 s 1/125 s 1/100 s 1/80 s 1/60 s (defaults to 1/250 s) Choose a flash sync speed. A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M, select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel. A Auto FP High-Speed Sync Selecting an “Auto FP” option allows compatible flash units to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera (0 314). Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled automatically at shutter speeds faster than the chosen flash sync speed (1/320 s or 1/250 s depending on the option selected), allowing wider apertures for reduced depth of field even in daylight. If the shutter-speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder show a value equal to the flash sync speed in modes P and A, auto FP high-speed sync will still be activated if the actual shutter speed is even slightly faster. 282 e2 Flash shutter speed 1/60 s 1/30 s 1/15 s 1/8 s 1/4 s 1/2 s 1s 2s 4s 8s 15 s 30 s e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash TTL Manual Repeating flash Commander mode e3 Optional flash TTL Manual Commander mode e4 Exposure comp. for flash Entire frame Background only (defaults to 1/60 s) Choose the slowest shutter available when the flash is used in modes P and A. (defaults to TTL) Choose the flash control mode for the built-in flash. (defaults to TTL) Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units. (defaults to Entire frame) Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used. 283 e5 Modeling flash On Off e6 Auto bracketing set AE & flash AE only Flash only WB bracketing ADL bracketing e7 Bracketing order MTR > under > over Under > MTR > over f Controls f1 OK button Shooting mode Playback mode Live view f2 Assign Fn button Press Press + command dials 284 (defaults to On) Choose whether the built-in flash unit and optional CLS-compatible flash units (0 144, 311) emit a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is pressed during viewfinder photography (0 55). (defaults to AE & flash) Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect (0 197). (defaults to MTR > under > over) Choose the bracketing order for exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing. Choose the roles assigned to the J button during viewfinder photography, playback, and live view. Choose the role played by the Fn button, either by itself (Press) or when used in combination with the command dials (Press + command dials). f3 Assign preview button Press Press + command dials f4 Assign AE-L/AF-L button Press Press + command dials f5 Customize command dials Reverse rotation Change main/sub Aperture setting Menus and playback Sub-dial frame advance f6 Release button to use dial Yes No Choose the role played by the Pv button, either by itself (Press) or when used in combination with the command dials (Press + command dials). Choose the role played by the A AE-L/ AF-L button, either by itself (Press) or when used in combination with the command dials (Press + command dials). Choose the roles played by the main and sub-command dials. (defaults to No) Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. Setting ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires. 285 f7 Slot empty release lock Release locked Enable release f8 Reverse indicators f9 Assign movie record button Press + command dials f10 Assign MB-D15 4 button AE/AF lock AE lock only AE lock (Hold) AF lock only AF-ON FV lock Same as camera Fn button 286 (defaults to Enable release) Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted. (defaults to ) If (W) is selected, the exposure indicators in the control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Select (V) to display positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Choose the role played by the movierecord button and command dials during viewfinder and photo live view. (defaults to AE/AF lock) Choose the function assigned to the A AE-L/AF-L button on the optional MB-D15 battery pack. f11 Assign remote (WR) Fn button (defaults to None) Preview Choose the role played by the Fn button on the optional wireless remote FV lock controller. AE/AF lock AE lock only AE lock (Hold) AF lock only Flash off + NEF (RAW) Live view Same as camera Fn button Same as camera Pv button Same as camera 4 button None 287 g Movie g1 Assign Fn button Press g2 Assign preview button Press g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button Press g4 Assign shutter button Take photos Record movies Choose the role played by the Fn button when 1 is selected with the live view selector in live view. Choose the role played by the Pv button when 1 is selected with the live view selector in live view. Choose the role played by the A AE-L/ AF-L button when 1 is selected with the live view selector in live view. (defaults to Take photos) Choose the role played by the shutterrelease button when 1 is selected with the live view selector. If Record movies is selected, pressing the button halfway starts live view. You can then press the shutter-release button halfway to focus (autofocus mode only) and press all the way down to start or end movie recording. To end live view, press the a button. A g4: Assign Shutter Button > Record Movies To use the shutter-release button for purposes other than movie recording, rotate the live view selector to C. 288 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup Format memory card Slot 1 Slot 2 Save user settings Save to U1 Save to U2 Reset user settings Reset U1 Reset U2 Monitor brightness –5 – +5 To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required. Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial (0 63). To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values (0 65). (defaults to 0) Adjust the brightness of the menu, playback, and information displays. A Formatting Memory Cards Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory cards during formatting. In addition to the Format memory card option in the setup menu, memory cards can be formatted using the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons: keep both buttons pressed simultaneously until formatting indicators are displayed and then press the buttons again to format the card. If two memory cards are inserted when the buttons are first pressed, the card to be formatted will be shown by a flashing icon. Rotate the main command dial to choose a different slot. 289 Monitor color balance Clean image sensor Clean now Clean at startup/shutdown Lock mirror up for cleaning Start Image Dust Off ref photo Start Clean sensor and then start Flicker reduction Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz Time zone and date Time zone Date and time Date format Daylight saving time Language See page 357. Auto image rotation On Off 290 (defaults to 0) Adjust monitor color balance. Vibrate the image sensor to remove dust (0 321). Lock the mirror up so that dust can be removed from the image sensor with a blower. Not available when the battery is low (J or lower). Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (0 ii). (defaults to Auto) Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercuryvapor lighting during live view. Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off. Choose a language for camera menus and messages. (defaults to On) Choose whether to record camera orientation when taking photographs. Battery info View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera or in an optional MB-D15 battery pack. Image comment Attach comment Input comment Copyright information Attach copyright information Artist Copyright Save/load settings Save settings Load settings Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D (0 ii). Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D (0 ii). Save camera settings to or load camera settings from a memory card. Settings files can be shared with other D7200 cameras. Virtual horizon View a virtual horizon with a roll display based on information from the camera tilt sensor. Non-CPU lens data Lens number Focal length (mm) Maximum aperture Record the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing them to be used with functions normally reserved for CPU lenses (0 224). 291 AF fine-tune AF fine-tune (On/Off) Saved value Default List saved values HDMI Output resolution Device control Advanced Location data Standby timer Position Set clock from satellite Wi-Fi Network connection Network settings Select to send to smart device NFC Enable Disable 292 Fine-tune focus for different lens types. AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus; use only when required. Choose an output resolution or enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI-CEC. Adjust settings for optional GP-1 and GP-1A GPS units. Adjust Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) settings for connection to an Android or iOS smart device, or select pictures for upload to a smart device (0 251). (defaults to Enable) If Enable is selected, wireless connections can be established simply by touching the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the NFC antennas on compatible smart devices (0 254). Network Choose hardware Network settings Options Eye-Fi upload Slot 1 Slot 2 Adjust ftp and network settings for Ethernet and wireless LANs when an optional UT-1 communications unit (0 319) is connected. Upload pictures to a preselected destination. This option is displayed only when a supported Eye-Fi card is inserted. Conformity marking View a selection of the standards with which the camera complies. Firmware version View the current camera firmware version. 293 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies D-Lighting Brighten shadows. Choose for dark or backlit photographs. Red-eye correction Correct “red-eye” in photos taken with a flash. Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph (0 298). Monochrome Black-and-white Sepia Cyanotype Filter effects Skylight Warm filter Cross screen Soft Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome). Create the effects of the following filters: • Skylight: A skylight filter effect • Warm filter: A warm tone filter effect • Cross screen: Adds starburst effects to light sources • Soft: A soft filter effect Image overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals (0 299). Image overlay can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab. 294 NEF (RAW) processing Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs (0 302). Resize Select image Choose destination Choose size Quick retouch Create small copies of selected photographs. Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. Straighten Create straightened copies. Copies can be straightened by up to 5° in increments of approximately 0.25°. Distortion control Auto Manual Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Use to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wideangle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in photos taken with telephoto lenses. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically. Fisheye Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye lens. Color outline Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for painting. Color sketch Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made with colored pencils. 295 Perspective control Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from the base of a tall object. Miniature effect Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Use the multi selector to choose the position and orientation of the area in focus. Works best with photos taken from a high vantage point. Selective color Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color. Position the cursor over objects with desired colors and press the A AE-L/AF-L button. The selected colors (maximum three) appear in the frames at the top of the display; rotate the main command dial to highlight a frame and press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of hues selected. Edit movie Choose start/end point Save selected frame Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills (0 179). Side-by-side comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. Side-by-side comparison is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by pressing i and selecting Retouch in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed. 296 O My Menu/m Recent Settings Add items PLAYBACK MENU PHOTO SHOOTING MENU MOVIE SHOOTING MENU CUSTOM SETTING MENU SETUP MENU RETOUCH MENU Remove items Create a custom menu of up to 20 items selected from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Setting, setup, and retouch menus. Delete items from My Menu. Rank items Choose tab MY MENU RECENT SETTINGS Rank items in My Menu. (defaults to MY MENU) Choose the menu displayed in the “My Menu/Recent Settings” tab. Select RECENT SETTINGS to display a menu listing the 20 most recently-used settings. 297 Retouch Menu Options This section details retouch menu options. Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following table. To Use Reduce size of crop W (S) Increase size of crop X (T) Rotate the main command dial to choose the aspect ratio. Change crop aspect ratio Position crop Create copy Description Press W (S) to reduce the size of the crop. Press X (T) to increase the size of the crop. J Use multi selector to position the crop. Press and hold to move the crop rapidly to the desired position. Save the current crop as a separate file. A Trim: Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality (0 77) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display. A Viewing Cropped Copies Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed. 298 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (0 77, 81; all options are available). To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW). + 1 Select Image overlay. Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. 2 Select the first image. Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the X (T) button. Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display. 299 3 Select the second image. The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as described in Step 2. 4 Adjust gain. Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects are visible in the Preview column. 5 Preview the overlay. To preview the composition as shown at right, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview column, then press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay and press J (note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press W (S). 6 Save the overlay. Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor. 300 D Image Overlay Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined. The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation), and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied. Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority compression. 301 NEF (RAW) Processing Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs. 1 Select NEF (RAW) processing. Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2 to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. 2 Select a photograph. Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph (to view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the X/T button). Press J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step. 302 3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy. Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure compensation can only be set to values between –2 and +2 EV. Image quality (0 77) Image size (0 81) White balance (0 111) Exposure compensation (0 109) Set Picture Control (0 130) High ISO NR (0 271) Color space (0 270) Vignette control (0 271) D-Lighting (0 294) 4 Copy the photograph. Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph (to exit without copying the photograph, press the G button). 303 Technical Notes Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera. Compatible Lenses Camera setting CPU lenses 5 Lens/accessory Type G, E, or D AF NIKKOR 6 AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR PC-E NIKKOR series 8 PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 10 AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter 12 Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P NIKKOR 304 Focus mode Shooting mode P A S M 3D Metering system L2 Color M3 N4 AF M (with electronic rangefinder) 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔7 — ✔9 ✔9 ✔9 ✔9 — ✔ 7,9 — ✔9 — ✔ 11 ✔ — ✔ 7,9 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔7 ✔ 13 ✔ 13 ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔7 — ✔ 14 ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔7 Camera setting Focus mode Shooting mode P A S M Metering system Non-CPU lenses 15 L2 M (with electronic M3 AF rangefinder) 1 Lens/accessory 3D Color N 4 AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon — ✔ 14 — ✔ 17 — ✔ 18 ✔ 19 Series E lenses 16 Medical-NIKKOR — — ✔ — ✔ 20 — — 120mm f/4 17 — — ✔ 19 Reflex-NIKKOR — — — ✔ PC-NIKKOR — ✔9 — ✔ 21 — — ✔ AI-type — ✔ 23 — ✔ 17 — ✔ 18 ✔ 19 Teleconverter 22 PB-6 Bellows Focusing — ✔ 23 — ✔ 25 — — ✔ Attachment 24 Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or — ✔ 23 — ✔ 17 — — ✔ 13; PN-11) 1 Manual focus available with all lenses. 2 Matrix. 3 Center-weighted. 4 Spot. 5 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. 6 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses. 7 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 105). 8 The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the lens is revolved. 9 Can not be used with shifting or tilting. 10 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used. 11 Manual shooting mode only. 305 12 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 307). For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 307. 13 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus. 14 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 15 Some lenses can not be used (see page 308). 16 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera. 17 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 225), aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel. 18 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 225). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not achieved. 19 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non-CPU lens data (0 225). 20 Can be used in mode M at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more. 21 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In mode A, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens. In mode M, preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens. 22 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. 23 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 24 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required depending on camera orientation. 25 Use preset aperture. In mode A, set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph. • PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder. • With some lenses, noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock. 306 A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note that IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. CPU contacts CPU lens Aperture ring Type G/E lens Type D lens A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters If the combined aperture when the camera is used with an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is slower than f/5.6 but is equal to or faster than f/8, autofocus and electronic rangefinding will be available only with the center focus point and the camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast subjects. Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode (0 86). Autofocus is not available if teleconverters are used with the AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED. If TC-17E II, TC-20E, TC-20E II, or TC-20E III teleconverters are used with the AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/4E PF ED VR, autofocus is available only in AF-S mode. A Lens f-number The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens. 307 A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses Non-CPU lens data (0 225) can be used to enable many of the features available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if no data are provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix metering, while if the maximum aperture is not provided, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring. D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses The following can NOT be used with the D7200: • TC-16A AF teleconverter • Non-AI lenses • Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11) • Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6) • 2.1cm f/4 • Extension Ring K2 • 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180) • 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127) • 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490) • AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16) • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier) • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001– 906200) • PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type) • Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type) • Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000) • Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310) D Red-Eye Reduction Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. 308 A AF-Assist Illumination The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18– 200 mm. Some lenses may block the illuminator at certain focus distances. Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator. More information on lenses that can be used with the AF-assist illuminator may be found in the camera Menu Guide, which is available for download from the following website: http://nikonimglib.com/manual/ A The Built-in Flash The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses. It can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens. The following illustrations show the effect of vignetting caused by shadows cast by the lens when the flash is used. Shadow Vignetting Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. More information on lenses that can be used with the built-in flash may be found in the camera Menu Guide, which is available for download from the following website: http://nikonimglib.com/manual/ 309 A Calculating Angle of View The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed by the D7200 when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area in the photo shooting menu, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D7200 (when 1.3× (18×12) is selected, the size of the area exposed decreases, further reducing the angle of view by about 1.3×). 35 mm format picture size (36 × 24 mm) Picture size when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area (23.5 × 15.6 mm) Picture size when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area (18.8 × 12.5 mm) Lens Picture diagonal 35 mm format angle of view Angle of view when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area Angle of view when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area 310 Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached. The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography. ❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units: • The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, SB-400, SB-300, and SB-R200: SB-R200 4 SB-300 3 SB-400 3 SB-500 2 SB-600 SB-700 1 SB-800 SB-910, SB-900 1 Flash unit Feature Guide No. (ISO 100) 5 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 24/78 21/69 18/59 10/33 1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or M (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately. 2 Users of the LED light can set camera white balance to v or M for optimal results. 3 Wireless flash control is not available. 4 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander. 5 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination. 311 • SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLScompatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash. A Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet, 111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4). A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync terminal. 312 The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units: SB-300 SB-400 SB-R200 SU-800 SB-500 SB-600 SB-700 SB-910, SB-900, SB-800 Single flash i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR 1 i-TTL Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR AA Auto aperture A Non-TTL auto GN Distance-priority manual M Manual RPT Repeating flash Remote flash control i-TTL i-TTL [A:B] Quick wireless flash control AA Auto aperture A Non-TTL auto M Manual RPT Repeating flash i-TTL i-TTL [A:B] Quick wireless flash control AA Auto aperture A Non-TTL auto M Manual RPT Repeating flash Color Information Communication (flash) Color Information Communication (LED light) Remote Master Advanced Wireless Lighting z z z z — — z z z2 z z2 z — — z z z3 z3 z z z z z — z6 z z z z z z6 z z z z — — — z z — z z z — — z — z z — — z z z — — — — z — — — — — — — — z z — — z z z — — — — z4 — z4 z4 — — — z4 — z z — — z z z z — — — — — z — z5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — z z — — z — — — — — — z4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — z — — — — z4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — z — 313 SB-300 SB-400 SB-R200 SB-500 SU-800 SB-600 SB-700 SB-910, SB-900, SB-800 z z z z z z — — Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7 z z z z z z z z FV lock 8 AF-assist for multi-area AF z z z — z9 — — — Red-eye reduction z z z z — — z — Camera modeling illumination z z z z z z — — Camera flash mode selection — — — z — — z z Camera flash unit firmware update z 10 z — z — — — z 1 Not available with spot metering. 2 Can also be selected with flash unit. 3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu, “A” will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used. 4 Can only be selected with camera. 5 Available only during close-up photography. 6 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash unit. 7 Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes. 8 Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes. 9 Available only in commander mode. 10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera. A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock (0 153) is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where supported) monitor pre-flash AA and monitor pre-flash A flash control modes. Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control remote flash units, you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA. 314 ❚❚ Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. SB-80DX, SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-23, SB-28DX, SB-22S, SB-22, SB-29 3, SB-28, SB-26, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-21B 3, SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX 1 SB-15 SB-29S 3 Flash mode A Non-TTL auto ✔ — ✔ — M Manual ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ G Repeating flash ✔ — — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ REAR Rear-curtain sync 4 1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only. 2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (nonTTL auto flash). 3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only. 4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode. Flash unit A Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows: Flash unit Flash mode i-TTL Metered area 4-mm circle in center of frame Stand-alone flash Area metered by flash unit AA exposure meter i-TTL Entire frame Used with other flash units (Advanced AA Area metered by flash Wireless Lighting) A (master flash) exposure meter 315 D Notes on Optional Flash Units Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D7200 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals. If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, and u, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used. i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator (M) flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only; for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other units, see the manual provided with the flash). When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor. In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure. 316 The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions: • SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available when 17–135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points shown at right. • SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist 24–34 mm illumination is available when 24–105 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points 35–49 mm shown at right. 50–105 mm • SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available when 24– 135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points shown at right. Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled. In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below: Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of: 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 4 4.8 5.6 6.7 8 9.5 11 13 If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens. 317 A Flash Control Mode The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows: Flash sync Auto FP (0 282) i-TTL Auto aperture (AA) Non-TTL auto flash (A) Distance-priority manual (GN) Manual Repeating flash — Advanced wireless lighting D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikonauthorized service representative for more information. 318 Other Accessories At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D7200. • Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15 (0 21, 22) • Battery Charger MH-25a (0 21) Power sources • Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D15 • Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5b • DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses • Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M Viewfinder eyepiece • Magnifier DG-2 accessories • Eyepiece Adapter DK-22 • Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6 • Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (0 156) Remote controls/ • Wireless Remote Controllers WR-T10 and WR-R10 wireless remote (0 160) controllers/ • Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (0 160) remote cords • Remote Cord MC-DC2 (0 58) GPS units • GPS Unit GP-1/GPS Unit GP-1A (0 227) • Communication Unit UT-1 LAN adapters • Wireless Transmitter WT-5 HDMI cables HDMI Cable HC-E1 Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0 193) Accessory shoe covers Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1 Body cap Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A • Camera Control Pro 2 Software • ViewNX-i • Capture NX-D Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest information. 319 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that: • are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60% • are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios • are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F) Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened Camera in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or body other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty. These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust Lens, mirror, and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the and can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care. Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a Monitor soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals. 320 Image Sensor Cleaning If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off. ❚❚ “Clean Now” Holding the camera base down, select Clean image sensor in the setup menu, then highlight Clean now and press J. The camera will check the image sensor and then begin cleaning. P flashes in the control panel and other operations can not be performed while cleaning is in progress. Do not remove or disconnect the power source until cleaning ends and the setup menu is displayed. 321 ❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown” Choose from the following options: Option 5 6 7 Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned Clean at startup each time the camera is turned on. The image sensor is automatically cleaned Clean at shutdown during shutdown each time the camera is turned off. Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at shutdown startup and at shutdown. Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off. 1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown. Display the Clean image sensor menu as described on page 321. Highlight Clean at startup/ shutdown and press 2. 2 Select an option. Highlight an option and press J. 322 D Image Sensor Cleaning Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging. If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 324) or consult a Nikon-authorized service representative. If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait. 323 ❚❚ Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu (0 321), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel. 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter. A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the image sensor. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and power connector. The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is only available in the setup menu at battery levels over J. 2 Remove the lens. Turn the camera off and remove the lens. 3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning. Turn the camera on and highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press 2. 324 4 Press J. The message shown at right will be displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. To restore normal operation without inspecting the image sensor, turn the camera off. 5 Raise the mirror. Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open, revealing the image sensor. The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will flash. 6 Examine the image sensor. Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor, examine the sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 8. 325 7 Clean the sensor. Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the sensor. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the sensor. 8 Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap. A Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions: • Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised. • If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately. 326 D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses in dusty environments. Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the image sensor cleaning option as described on page 321. If the problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0 324) or have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging applications. D Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced. 327 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration. Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage. Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature. Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry. Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs. Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected. 328 Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon return to normal. The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully. See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 321, 324) for information on cleaning the image sensor. Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean. Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain. Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away. 329 Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device. Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth. The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xiii of this manual. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries: • Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. • Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat. • Keep the battery terminals clean. • Turn the product off before replacing the battery. • Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months. • Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use. 330 • The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before charging. • Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). • If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative. • Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again. • Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info (0 291) display may show a temporary decrease. • Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance. 331 • A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery. • The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the MH-25a only. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use. • Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge. • Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations. 332 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative. Battery/Display The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power source. Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 25). If this does not correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 83), singlepoint AF (0 86), and the center focus point (0 91), and then frame a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 319). Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 21, 26). Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer) or c4 (Monitor off delay; 0 279). Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature. Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction. 333 Shooting (All Modes) Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders. Shutter-release disabled: • Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 22, 29). • Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Slot empty release lock; 0 286) and no memory card is inserted (0 29). • Built-in flash is charging (0 36). • Camera is not in focus (0 34). • Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not apply to type G and E lenses). If B is displayed in control panel, select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0 285). • Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode A or M (0 51). Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting d4 (Exposure delay mode; 0 280). No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed: • Replace battery in remote control. • Choose an option other than Off for Remote control mode (ML-L3) (0 156). • Flash is charging (0 158). • Time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 279) has elapsed. • Bright light is interfering with remote. Photos are out of focus: • Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 83). • Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (0 93, 97). Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus when AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode. 334 Can not select focus point: • Unlock focus selector lock (0 89). • Auto-area AF selected, or face detected when face-priority AF is selected in live view: choose another mode (0 86, 88). • Camera is in playback mode (0 229) or menus are in use (0 266). • Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 37). Can not select AF mode: Manual focus selected (0 83, 97). Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (0 83, 97). Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release mode: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (0 148). Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 77). Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0 271). AF-assist illuminator does not light: • AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode (0 83) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. If an option other than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus point (0 91). • The camera is currently in live view. • Off is selected for Custom Setting a9 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 0 277). • Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use; wait for it to cool down. Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 321). 335 Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos: • Bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and lines can be reduced by lowering ISO sensitivity. • Use the Long exposure NR option in the photo shooting menu to limit the occurrence of bright spots or fog in photos taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s (0 271). • Fog and bright spots may indicate that the camera’s internal temperature has become elevated due to high ambient temperatures, long exposures, or similar causes: turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before resuming shooting. • At high ISO sensitivities, lines may appear in photos taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower value. • At high ISO sensitivities, including Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 and high values selected with auto ISO sensitivity control, randomly-spaced bright pixels can be reduced by selecting High, Normal, or Low for High ISO NR in the photo or movie shooting menu (0 271, 275). • At high ISO sensitivities, bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may be more noticeable in long exposures, multiple exposures, and photos taken at high ambient temperatures or with Active D-Lighting enabled, Flat selected for Set Picture Control (0 130) or extreme values selected for Picture Control parameters (0 133). • In % mode, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may be more noticeable in pictures shot under low light. Flicker or banding appears in live view: Choose an option for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0 290). Bright regions or bands appear in live view: A flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief duration was used during live view. Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu (0 273). 336 Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if: • The ambient temperature is high • The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies • The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended periods If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction. Image artifacts appear during live view: “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens (0 38) during live view; in movies, the amount and distribution of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and bright spots is affected by frame size and rate (0 166). Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during live view; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes. Shooting (P, S, A, M) Shutter-release disabled: • Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to A or M (0 51). • Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of A or % selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed (0 53). Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using compatible flash units, choose 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0 282). 337 Colors are unnatural: • Adjust white balance to match light source (0 111). • Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 130). Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 123). Image can not be selected as source for manual preset white balance: Image was not created with D7200 (0 127). White balance bracketing unavailable: • NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality (0 77). • Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 211). Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0 133). Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 107). Exposure compensation can not be used: Camera is in mode M. Choose another mode. Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long exposure noise reduction (0 271). Playback NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG (0 77). Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly. Some images are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder (0 266). 338 The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images: Use the Playback folder option in the playback menu to choose a folder that contains images (0 266). “Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation: • Select On for Rotate tall (0 267). • Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 290). • Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken. • Photo is displayed in image review (0 230). Can not delete picture: • Picture is protected: remove protection (0 245). • Memory card is locked (0 29). Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera (0 346). Can not change print order: • Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 40, 246). • Memory card is locked (0 29). Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Transfer photos to computer and print using Capture NX-D (0 ii). NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG format using NEF (RAW) processing (0 302). Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable is connected. Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television: • Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 292). • Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with the device. Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer. 339 Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed. Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette control. Use Capture NX-D (0 ii). Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name): • Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the camera setup menu (0 251). • Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again. Can not connect to smart devices using NFC (0 254): Choose another connection method (0 251). Miscellaneous Date of recording is not correct: The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary. Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC adapter. 340 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor. Indicator Control Viewpanel finder B (flashes) H d Problem Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum aperture. Low battery. • Battery exhausted. • Battery can not be used. H d (flashes) (flashes) F Solution 0 Set ring to minimum aperture (highest 29 f-number). Ready a fully-charged 21 spare battery. • Recharge or replace battery. • Contact Nikonauthorized service representative. • Replace the battery, or xviii, recharge the battery if 21, 22, the rechargeable 319 Li-ion battery is exhausted. • An extremely exhausted rechargeable Li-ion battery or a thirdparty battery is inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB-D15 battery pack. No lens attached, or non-CPU lens attached Aperture value will be without specifying displayed if maximum maximum aperture. Aperture shown in aperture is specified. stops from maximum aperture. 224 341 Indicator Control Viewpanel finder i (flashes) Problem • No lens attached. Solution 0 • Attach non-IX Nikkor 23, 304 lens. If a CPU lens is attached, remove and reattach the lens. • Select mode A or M. 51 • Non-CPU lens attached. F H Camera unable to focus Change composition or — 96, 97 (flashes) using autofocus. focus manually. • Use a lower ISO 99 sensitivity. • In shooting mode: P Use a third-party — ND filter Subject too bright; S Increase shutter 53 photo will be speed overexposed. A Choose a smaller 54 aperture (higher (Exposure f-number) indicators and shutter speed or % Choose another 6 aperture display shooting mode flash) • Use a higher ISO 99 sensitivity. • In shooting mode: P Use flash 146 Subject too dark; photo S Lower shutter 53 will be underexposed. speed A Choose a larger 54 aperture (lower f-number) 342 Indicator Control Viewpanel finder A (flashes) % (flashes) P k (flashes) (flashes) Problem Solution 0 A selected in mode Change shutter speed 53, 56 S. or select mode M. Change shutter speed % selected in mode S. 53, 56 or select mode M. Wait until processing is Processing in progress. — complete. Check photo in If indicator flashes for 3s monitor; if M — after flash fires, photo 229 (flashes) underexposed, adjust may be underexposed. settings and try again. • Reduce quality or size. 77, 81 • Delete photographs 246 Memory insufficient to after copying record further photos at important images to n j current settings, or computer or other (flashes) (flashes) camera has run out of device. file or folder numbers. • Insert new memory 22 card. Release shutter. If error persists or appears O frequently, consult — Camera malfunction. (flashes) Nikon-authorized service representative. 343 Indicator Monitor No memory card. Control panel S This memory card cannot be used. W, Card may be O damaged. (flashes) Insert another card. g 344 W, O (flashes) Solution 0 Turn camera off Camera cannot and confirm that detect memory 22 card is correctly card. inserted. • Error accessing • Use Nikon379 memory card. approved card. — • Check that contacts are clean. If card is damaged, contact retailer or Nikonauthorized service representative. 22, 246 • Unable to create • Delete files or new folder. insert new memory card after copying important images to computer or other device. • Check that Eye-Fi — card firmware is up to date. Camera can not • Copy files on Eye- 22, 293 control Eye-Fi Fi card to a card. computer or other device and format card, or insert new card. Problem Indicator Control panel Monitor Problem Memory card is W, Memory card is locked. Slide lock to X locked (write “write” position. (flashes) protected). W, Eye-Fi card is Not available if O locked (write Eye-Fi card is locked. (flashes) protected). Memory card has This card is not [C] not been formatted. (flashes) formatted for use Format the card. in camera. Clock has been Camera clock is — reset. not set. The internal Unable to start live temperature of — view. Please wait. the camera is high. Folder contains no images. — All images are hidden. — Solution 0 Slide card writeprotect switch to “write” position. 29 Format memory card or insert new memory card. 22, 289 Set camera clock. 24, 290 Wait for the internal circuits to cool 337 before resuming live view. Select folder No images on containing images memory card or from Playback 22, 266 in folder(s) folder menu or selected for insert memory card playback. containing images. No images can be played back until another folder has All photos in been selected or current folder are 266 Hide image used hidden. to allow at least one image to be displayed. 345 Indicator Monitor 346 Control panel Cannot display this file. — Cannot select this file. — This movie cannot be edited. — Could not connect; multiple devices detected. Try again later. — Error — Problem Solution File has been created or modified using a File can not be computer or played back on different make of camera. camera, or file is corrupt. Images created Selected image with other devices can not be can not be retouched. retouched. • Movies created with other devices can not The selected movie can not be be edited. edited. • Movies must be at least two seconds long. Multiple smart devices are attempting to Wait a few minutes connect to before trying again. camera simultaneously. Select Disable for Wi-Fi > Network Wi-Fi error. connection, then select Enable again. 0 — — — 182 — 256 Indicator Monitor Control panel Problem The internal temperature of the camera is high. Solution Turn camera off Network access not and try again after available until — waiting for camera camera cools. to cool. Check printer. To resume, select Check printer. — Printer error. Continue (if available). Paper in printer is Insert paper of Check paper. — not of selected correct size and size. select Continue. Paper is jammed Clear jam and Paper jam. — in printer. select Continue. Insert paper of Printer is out of Out of paper. — selected size and paper. select Continue. Check ink. To resume, select Check ink supply. — Ink error. Continue. Printer is out of Replace ink and Out of ink. — ink. select Continue. * See printer manual for more information. 0 — —* —* —* —* —* —* 347 Specifications ❚❚ Nikon D7200 Digital Camera Type Type Lens mount Effective angle of view Effective pixels Effective pixels Image sensor Image sensor Total pixels Dust-reduction System Storage Image size (pixels) 348 Single-lens reflex digital camera Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts) Nikon DX format; focal length in 35 mm [135] format equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle of view 24.2 million 23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor 24.72 million Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (Capture NX-D software required) • DX (24×16) image area 6000 × 4000 (#) 4496 × 3000 ($) 2992 × 2000 (%) • 1.3× (18×12) image area 4800 × 3200 (#) 3600 × 2400 ($) 2400 × 1600 (%) • Photographs with image area of DX (24×16) taken with live view selector rotated to 1 in live view 6000 × 3368 (#) 4496 × 2528 ($) 2992 × 1680 (%) • Photographs with image area of 1.3× (18×12) taken with live view selector rotated to 1 in live view 4800 × 2696 (#) 3600 × 2024 ($) 2400 × 1344 (%) Storage File format Picture Control System Media Double slot File system Viewfinder Viewfinder Frame coverage Magnification Eyepoint Diopter adjustment • NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed or compressed • JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression (Size priority); Optimal quality compression available • NEF (RAW) + JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of copies created using NEF+JPEG; pictures can be copied between cards. DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder • DX (24×16) image area: Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical • 1.3× (18×12) image area: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical Approx. 0.94 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1) 19.5 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens) –2–+1 m–1 349 Viewfinder Focusing screen Reflex mirror Depth-of-field preview Lens aperture Lens Compatible lenses Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets (framing grid can be displayed) Quick return Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (other modes) Instant return, electronically controlled Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type G, E, and D lenses (some restrictions apply to PC lenses) and DX lenses, AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU AI lenses (A and M modes only). IX NIKKOR lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI lenses can not be used. The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the electronic rangefinder supports the center 1 focus point with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or faster). 350 Shutter Type Speed Flash sync speed Release Release mode Approximate frame advance rate Self-timer Remote control modes (ML-L3) Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane shutter 1/8000–30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time, X250 X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower (flash range drops at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s) S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH (continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutterrelease), E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up) • JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with DX (24×16) selected for Image area CL: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps • JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with 1.3× (18×12) selected for Image area CL: 1–6 fps CH: 7 fps • 14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with DX (24×16) selected for Image area CL: 1–5 fps CH: 5 fps • 14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with 1.3× (18×12) selected for Image area CL: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps Note: Maximum frame rate in live view is 3.7 fps. 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s Delayed remote, quick-response remote, remote mirror-up 351 Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor Metering method • Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data • Center-weighted: Weight of approximately 75% given to 8 mm circle in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed to 6, 10, or 13 mm, or weighting can be based on average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 8-mm circle) • Spot: Meters circle with diameter of about 3.5 mm (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used) Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens, • Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV 20 °C/68 °F) • Spot metering: 2–20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI Mode Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene modes (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/ indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/dawn; w pet portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes (% night vision; g color sketch; i miniature effect; u selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key); programmed auto with flexible program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperturepriority auto (A); manual (M); U1 (user settings 1); U2 (user settings 2) 352 Exposure Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of /3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, M, SCENE, and % modes Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with A AE-L/AF-L button ISO sensitivity ISO 100–25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV. In P, S, A, (Recommended Exposure and M modes, can also be set to approx. 1 or Index) 2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent; monochrome only) above ISO 25600; auto ISO sensitivity control available Active D-Lighting Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, Off 1 Focus Autofocus Detection range Lens servo Focus point AF-area mode Focus lock Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500 II autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection, finetuning, 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8 supported by 1 sensor), and AFassist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.) –3 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F) • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status • Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points Single-point AF; 9-, 21-, or 51-point dynamicarea AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing A AE-L/AF-L button 353 Flash Built-in flash Guide Number Flash control Flash mode Flash compensation Flash-ready indicator Accessory shoe Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) Sync terminal 354 i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g: Auto flash with auto pop-up P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F) TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix or center-weighted metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR with spot metering Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fillflash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off; Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported –3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon CLS supported; commander mode option available AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) White balance White balance Bracketing Bracketing types Live view Modes Lens servo AF-area mode Autofocus Movie Metering Metering method Frame size (pixels) and frame rate Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot white balance measurement available during live view), choose color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), all with fine-tuning Exposure, flash, white balance, and ADL C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view) • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time servo AF (AF-F) • Manual focus (M) Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point automatically when facepriority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected) TTL exposure metering using main image sensor Matrix or center-weighted • 1920 × 1080; 60p (progressive), 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p • 1280 × 720; 60p, 50p Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively; options support both ★high and normal image quality 1920 × 1080; 60p and 50p are available only when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area in the movie shooting menu 355 Movie File format Video compression Audio recording format Audio recording device Other options Monitor Monitor Playback Playback Interface USB HDMI output Accessory terminal Audio input Audio output 356 MOV H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding Linear PCM Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable Index marking, time-lapse photography 8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1229 k-dot (VGA; 640 × RGBW × 480 = 1,228,800 dots), TFT monitor with approx. 170° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame coverage, and brightness adjustment Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights, photo information, location data display, and auto image rotation Hi-Speed USB; connection to built-in USB port is recommended Type C HDMI connector • Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10 (available separately) • Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately) • GPS unit: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately) Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power supported) Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter) Wireless Standards Operating frequency Range (line of sight) Authentication Wireless setup Access protocols IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g 2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11) Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no interference; range may vary with signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles) 54 Mbps Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard. Actual rates may differ. Open system, WPA2-PSK Supports WPS Infrastructure NFC Operation NFC Forum Type 3 Tag Data rate Supported languages Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil, Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese 357 Power source Battery Battery pack AC adapter Tripod socket Tripod socket Dimensions/weight Dimensions (W × H × D) Weight One EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery Optional MB-D15 multi-power battery pack with one Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium batteries EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power connector (available separately) /4 in. (ISO 1222) 1 Approx. 135.5 × 106.5 × 76 mm (5.4 × 4.2 × 3.0 in.) Approx. 765 g (1 lb 11.0 oz) with battery and memory card but without body cap; approx. 675 g (1 lb 7.9 oz; camera body only) Operating environment Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Humidity 85% or less (no condensation) • Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) guidelines. • All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery. • Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain. 358 ❚❚ MH-25a Battery Charger Rated input (in North America) Rated input (in other regions) Rated output Supported batteries Charging time Operating temperature Dimensions (W × H × D) Length of power cable (if supplied) Weight AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A DC 8.4 V/1.2 A Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion batteries Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.), excluding projections Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied power connector (power cable or AC wall adapter) ❚❚ EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery Type Rated capacity Operating temperature Dimensions (W × H × D) Weight Rechargeable lithium-ion battery 7.0 V/1900 mAh 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.) Approx. 88 g (3.1 oz), excluding terminal cover 359 ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens Type Focal length Maximum aperture Lens construction Angle of view Focal length scale Distance information Zoom Focusing Vibration reduction Minimum focus distance Diaphragm blades Diaphragm Aperture range Metering Filter-attachment size Dimensions Weight 360 Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount 18–105 mm f/3.5–5.6 15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 ED lens element, 1 aspherical lens element) 76°–15° 20´ Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 105) Output to camera Manual zoom using independent zoom ring Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs) 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all zoom positions 7 (rounded diaphragm opening) Fully automatic • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22 • 105 mm focal length: f/5.6–38 The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera. Full aperture 67 mm (P=0.75 mm) Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange) Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz) ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens Type Focal length Maximum aperture Lens construction Angle of view Focal length scale Distance information Zoom Focusing Vibration reduction Minimum focus distance Diaphragm blades Diaphragm Aperture range Metering Filter-attachment size Dimensions Weight Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount 18–140 mm f/3.5–5.6 17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens element, 1 aspherical lens element) 76°–11° 30´ Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140) Output to camera Manual zoom using independent zoom ring Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs) 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all zoom positions 7 (rounded diaphragm opening) Fully automatic • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22 • 140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38 The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera. Full aperture 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm) Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange) Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz) 361 ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Lens Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount Focal length 18–200 mm Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6 Lens construction 16 elements in 12 groups (including 2 ED lens elements, 3 aspherical lens elements) Angle of view 76°–8° Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 135, 200) Distance information Output to camera Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs) Focus distance indicator 0.5 m to infinity (∞) Minimum focus distance 0.5 m (1.64 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all zoom positions Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening) Diaphragm Fully automatic Aperture range • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22 • 200 mm focal length: f/5.6–36 The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera. Metering Full aperture Filter-attachment size 72 mm (P = 0.75 mm) Dimensions Approx. 77 mm maximum diameter × 96.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange) Weight Approx. 565 g (19.9 oz) Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain. Type 362 Lenses This section describes the features available with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5– 5.6G ED VR II lenses. The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5– 5.6G ED VR. ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Focal length mark Focal length scale Lens cap Lens mounting mark (0 23) CPU contacts (0 307) Rear lens cap Zoom ring (0 33) Focus ring (0 97) A-M mode switch (0 97) Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 367) 363 ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Focal length mark Focal length scale Lens cap Lens mounting mark (0 23) CPU contacts (0 307) Rear lens cap Zoom ring (0 33) Focus ring (0 97) 364 A-M mode switch (0 97) Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 367) ❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Focus distance indicator Focal length mark Focus distance mark Lens mounting mark (0 23) Focal length scale CPU contacts (0 307) Lens cap Rear lens cap LOCK 18 Focus mode switch (0 97) Zoom ring (0 33) Zoom lock switch Focus ring (0 97) Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 367) Vibration reduction mode switch (0 368) A Zoom Lock Switch To lock the zoom ring, rotate it to the 18 mm position and slide the zoom lock switch to LOCK. This prevents the lens extending under its own weight while the camera is being carried from place to place. D Focus Distance Indicator Note that the focus distance indicator is intended only as a guide and may not accurately show the distance to the subject and may, due to depth of field or other factors, not show ∞ when the camera is focused on a distant object. 365 The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II are for use exclusively with Nikon DX format digital cameras. D Lens Care • Keep the CPU contacts clean. • Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers. • Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens. • The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element. • Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch. • When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the hood. • If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls. • Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage. • Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from reinforced plastic. 366 ❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR) The lenses described in this section support vibration reduction (VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned, allowing shutter speeds for DX format cameras to be slowed by approximately 3.5 stops (AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II) or 4.0 stops (AF-S DX NIKKOR 18– 140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR) at maximum zoom position (according to Camera and Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter speeds available and permits hand-held, tripod-free photography in a wide range of situations. To use vibration reduction, slide the vibration reduction switch to ON. Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual focus modes. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc. Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod. 367 D Vibration Reduction Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before shooting. A The Vibration Reduction Mode Switch (AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Lenses) The vibration reduction mode switch is used to select the vibration reduction mode when vibration reduction is on. • Select NORMAL to reduce the effects of vibration when photographing from a fixed position and in other situations with comparatively little camera motion. • Select ACTIVE to reduce the effects of vibration when shooting from a moving vehicle, while walking, and in other situations with active camera motion. Slide the vibration reduction mode switch to NORMAL for panning shots. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc. 368 A Using the Built-in Flash When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in flash). Shadow Vignetting AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR: Camera Zoom position D5300/D5000/D3100/ D3000 18 mm 24 mm 18 mm 24 mm 18 mm 24 mm 35–105 mm Minimum distance without vignetting 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 3.0 m/9 ft 10 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting All No vignetting 18 mm 24–105 mm 18 mm 24–105 mm 18 mm 24 mm 35–105 mm 1.5 m/4 ft 11 in. No vignetting 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting D5200/D5100/D3200 D5500/D3300 D7200/D7100/D7000/ D300 series/D200/D100/ D80 D90/D70 series D50 D60/D40 series 369 AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR: Camera Zoom position D7200/D7100/D7000/ D300 series/D200/D100 18 mm 24–140 mm 18 mm 24 mm 35–140 mm Minimum distance without vignetting 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting 18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 35–140 mm No vignetting D90/D80/D50 D5500/D5300/D5200/ D5100/D5000/D3300/ D3200/D3100/D3000/ D70 series/D60/D40 series AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II: Camera Zoom position D7200/D7100/D7000/ D300 series/D200/D100 18 mm 24–200 mm 24 mm 35 mm 50–200 mm 24 mm Minimum distance without vignetting 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. No vignetting 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in. 35–200 mm No vignetting D90/D80 D5500/D5300/D5200/ D5100/D5000/D3300/ D3200/D3100/D3000/ D70 series/D60/D50/ D40 series Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm. 370 A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • 67 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67 • Rear Lens Cap • Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018 • Bayonet Hood HB-32 Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—). When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use. A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • 67 mm screw-on filters • LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps 371 A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • 67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67 • Rear Lens Cap A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • 67 mm screw-on filters • LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps • Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018 • Bayonet Hood HB-32 Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—). When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use. 372 A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II • 72 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-72 • Rear Lens Cap • Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018 • Bayonet Hood HB-35 Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—). NORMAL ACTIVE When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use. A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II • 72 mm screw-on filters • LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps 373 A A Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those shown below. 1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject: If the focus point contains both foreground and background objects, the camera may focus on the background and the subject may be out of focus. Example: A far-off portrait subject at some distance from the background 2 The subject contains many fine details. The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that lack contrast or appear smaller than objects in the background. Example: A field of flowers In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (0 96). 374 A Using M/A (Autofocus with Manual Override) with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Lenses To focus using autofocus with manual override (M/A): 1 Slide the lens focus-mode switch (0 365) to M/A. 2 Focus. If desired, you can over-ride autofocus by rotating the lens focus ring while keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway (or while pressing the button to which AF-ON has been assigned in the Custom Settings menu). To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway (or press the button again). A Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation is complete and manually rotating the focus ring. Do not rotate the focus ring until the autofocus operation is complete. To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again. 375 ❚❚ Supported Standards • DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera. • DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. • Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exifcompliant printers. • PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer. • HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection. 376 Trademark Information IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or other countries and is used under license. Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC. Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc., in the United States and/or other countries. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. A Conformity Marking The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (0 293). A FreeType License (FreeType2) Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project (http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. A MIT License (HarfBuzz) Portions of this software are copyright © 2015 The HarfBuzz Project (http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved. 377 A Certificates 378 Approved Memory Cards The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording. Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used. SD cards SanDisk Toshiba 2 GB 1 Panasonic — 1 SDHC cards 2 SDXC cards 3 64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB, 512 GB 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB 4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 48 GB, 64 GB 16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB — Lexar Media 2 GB Multi-use 64 GB Platinum II 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB — Professional 64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB Full-HD Video 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB — 1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards. 2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHCcompliant. The camera supports UHS-1. 3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-1. Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please contact the manufacturer. 379 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s UHS-I SDHC card at different image quality (0 77), image size (0 81), and image area settings (0 73). ❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area Image quality NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit JPEG fine 3 JPEG normal 3 JPEG basic 3 380 Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2 — 22.2 MB 379 27 — 28.0 MB 294 18 — — Large Medium Small Large Medium Small Large Medium Small 20.6 MB 25.4 MB 12.7 MB 7.7 MB 3.9 MB 6.5 MB 3.9 MB 2.1 MB 2.7 MB 1.9 MB 1.1 MB 511 428 929 1500 2900 1800 3000 5600 3500 5700 10,300 35 26 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ❚❚ 1.3× (18×12) Image Area Image quality NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2 — 15.0 MB 575 44 — 18.7 MB 449 29 — 13.8 MB 770 67 — 16.9 MB 648 46 Large 8.6 MB 1300 100 Medium 5.3 MB 2200 100 JPEG fine 3 Small 2.9 MB 4000 100 Large 4.3 MB 2600 100 Medium 2.8 MB 4300 100 JPEG normal 3 Small 1.5 MB 7400 100 Large 2.0 MB 5100 100 Medium 1.4 MB 7900 100 JPEG basic 3 Small 0.9 MB 13,100 100 1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded. 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression (0 80), ISO sensitivity is set to 12800 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction or auto distortion control is on. 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly. A d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 280) The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100. 381 Battery Life The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, interval between shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be used. Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D15 multi-power battery pack are given below. • Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1) One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 1110 shots One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 1110 shots Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 630 shots • Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2) One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 4090 shots One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 4090 shots Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 1510 shots • Movies 3 One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 80 minutes of HD footage One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 80 minutes of HD footage Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 30 minutes of HD footage 382 1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot. Live view not used. 2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under the following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once standby timer expires. 3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds (1080/30p) in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises. The following can reduce battery life: • Using the monitor • Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway • Repeated autofocus operations • Taking NEF (RAW) photographs • Slow shutter speeds • Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) features • Using the camera with optional accessories • Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion batteries: • Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance. • Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused. 383 Index Symbols i (Auto mode) ....................................30 j (Auto (flash off) mode).................30 SCENE (Scene mode) ............................41 EFFECTS (Special effects) .....................44 k (Portrait) ............................................42 l (Landscape)......................................42 p (Child).................................................42 m (Sports)...............................................42 n (Close up)..........................................42 o (Night portrait)................................42 r (Night landscape)...........................42 s (Party/indoor)..................................42 t (Beach/snow)...................................42 u (Sunset)..............................................43 v (Dusk/dawn) ....................................43 w (Pet portrait) ....................................43 x (Candlelight)......................................43 y (Blossom)...........................................43 z (Autumn colors)..............................43 0 (Food)..................................................43 % (Night vision) ...................................44 g (Color sketch)..........................44, 46 i (Miniature effect)...................45, 47 u (Selective color) .......................45, 49 1 (Silhouette).......................................45 2 (High key)..........................................45 3 (Low key)...........................................45 P (Programmed auto) ........................52 S (Shutter-priority auto) ....................53 A (Aperture-priority auto).................54 M (Manual) .............................................56 U1/U2.........................................................62 S (Single frame) ....................................66 CL (Continuous low speed) ...............66 CH (Continuous high speed).............66 Q (Quiet shutter-release)...................66 384 E (Self-timer) ................................ 66, 69 MUP (Mirror up) .............................. 66, 71 ! (Face-priority AF)........................... 88 $ (Wide-area AF) ................................ 88 % (Normal-area AF)............................ 88 & (Subject-tracking AF) ................. 89 a (Matrix) ...........................................105 Z (Center-weighted)......................105 b (Spot)...............................................105 AUTO (Auto flash)................................145 Y (Red-eye reduction)......... 145, 147 SLOW (Slow sync)...................... 145, 147 REAR (Rear-curtain sync)..................147 E (Exposure compensation).........109 Y (Flash compensation)...............151 O (Flexible program).......................... 52 a (Live view) button.........12, 31, 161 i button ..................................... 189, 233 R (Info) button ..........................13, 185 J button ......................................17, 284 D switch ...................................................5 L (Preset manual)............... 111, 120 D (Bracketing)................................197 I (Focus indicator) .............. 34, 93, 98 t (Memory buffer).............................. 68 M (Flash-ready indicator) .................. 36 Numerics 1.3× (18×12) ...................... 73, 168, 169 12-bit....................................................... 80 14-bit....................................................... 80 3D-tracking .................................... 87, 90 A AC adapter ..........................................319 Accessories..........................................319 Active D-Lighting...........139, 207, 270 ADL bracketing..................................207 AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) . 197 AE lock.................................................. 107 AE only (Auto bracketing set) ...... 197 AE-L/AF-L button........ 94, 107, 285, 288 AF ...................................................... 83–95 AF activation ...................................... 277 AF area brackets ................. 10, 25, 235 AF fine-tune........................................ 292 AF-A..........................................................83 AF-area mode .......................................86 AF-assist......................................277, 317 AF-C................................................ 83, 276 AF-F ..........................................................84 AF-mode button...........................84, 90 AF-S ......................................... 83, 84, 276 After delete......................................... 267 Angle of view..................................... 310 Aperture ......................................... 54–56 Aperture-priority auto.......................54 Aspect ratio ........................................ 298 Auto (White balance).............111, 112 Auto bracketing.......................197, 284 Auto distortion control .................. 271 Auto flash ............................................ 145 Auto image rotation........................ 290 Auto ISO sensitivity control.......... 102 Auto-area AF ..................................87, 90 Autoexposure lock........................... 107 Autofocus....................................... 83–95 Autofocus mode..................................83 Auto-servo AF.......................................83 B Backlight................................................... 5 Backup (Role played by card in Slot 2)..............................................................82 Battery....................21, 22, 26, 291, 359 Battery life........................................... 382 Battery pack ....................................... 319 Beep ...................................................... 280 Body cap..........................................3, 319 Bracketing ................................. 197, 284 Built-in flash .................................36, 144 Bulb................................................... 58, 59 C Calendar playback............................232 Camera Control Pro 2 ......................319 Capture NX-D ..........................................ii Center-weighted..................... 105, 278 Charging the battery ......................... 21 Choose color temp. (White balance) 111, 117 Choose start/end point ..................179 Clean image sensor..........................321 Clock battery ......................................188 Cloudy (White balance) ..................111 CLS..........................................................311 Color outline.......................................295 Color sketch ..........................44, 46, 295 Color space..........................................270 Color temperature.........111, 113, 117 Command dial ...................................285 Communication unit .......................319 Compatible lenses............................304 Compressed (Type) ............................ 80 Conformity marking .............. 293, 377 Connector for external microphone. 2 Continuous high speed .................... 66 Continuous low speed.............66, 280 Continuous release mode ............... 66 Continuous-servo AF......................... 83 Control panel...........................................9 Copy image(s) ....................................267 Copyright................................... 240, 291 CPU contacts ......................................307 CPU lens ........................................29, 304 Creative Lighting System...............311 Custom Settings................................276 385 D Date and time............................. 24, 290 DCF........................................................ 376 Default settings ................................ 194 Delayed remote (Remote control mode (ML-L3)) ................................. 156 Delete............................................ 40, 246 Delete all images.............................. 248 Delete current image............... 40, 246 Delete selected images.................. 248 Depth-of-field.......................................55 Destination................................192, 273 Digital Print Order Format ............ 376 Diopter adjustment control . 25, 319, 333 Direct sunlight (White balance) .. 111 Distortion control............................. 295 D-Lighting........................................... 294 DPOF............................................267, 376 DX (24×16).......................... 73, 168, 169 Dynamic-area AF..........................86, 90 E Edit movie.........................179, 233, 296 Electronic rangefinder.......................98 EV steps for exposure cntrl ........... 278 Exif ......................................................... 376 Exposure.....................................105–110 Exposure bracketing....................... 197 Exposure compensation...... 109, 278, 283 Exposure delay mode..................... 280 Exposure indicator.................... 57, 286 Exposure lock .................................... 107 Exposure meters..................................37 External microphone ...................... 193 Eye-Fi upload..................................... 293 F Face-priority AF ...................................88 386 File naming ............................... 268, 273 File number sequence ....................280 Filter effects .............................. 134, 294 Fine-tune optimal exposure .........278 Fine-tuning white balance ............114 Firmware version ..............................293 Fisheye..................................................295 Flash ......... 36, 144, 145, 151, 153, 311 Flash (White balance)......................111 Flash bracketing................................197 Flash cntrl for built-in flash ...........283 Flash compensation ........................151 Flash mode................................ 145, 147 Flash only (Auto bracketing set) .197 Flash range..........................................150 Flash ready indicator ..... 36, 154, 280, 316 Flash shutter speed................ 148, 283 Flash sync speed ..................... 282, 351 Flat (Set Picture Control)................130 Flexible program................................. 52 Flicker reduction ...............................290 Fluorescent (White balance).........111 Fn button............................. 76, 284, 288 f-number................................52, 54, 307 Focal length.............................. 225, 309 Focal length scale..........363, 364, 365 Focal plane mark................................. 98 Focus indicator ...................... 34, 93, 98 Focus lock.............................................. 93 Focus mode .......................................... 83 Focus point ...... 33, 34, 86, 89, 98, 277 Focus tracking.............................85, 276 Focusing screen ................................350 Focus-mode selector......................... 83 Format memory card ......................289 Frame size/frame rate ..166, 192, 273 Framing guides ............................ 13, 14 Frequency response .............. 192, 274 Front-curtain sync ............................147 Full-frame playback .........................229 Full-time servo AF ...............................84 FV lock .................................................. 153 G GPS ...............................................227, 241 H H.264..................................................... 356 HDMI.................................. 170, 292, 376 HDMI connector .................................... 2 Headphone volume ........................ 193 Headphones....................................... 193 Help..........................................................17 Hi ISO command dial access ........ 101 Hide image ......................................... 266 High definition .................................. 376 High Dynamic Range (HDR) 141, 270 High ISO NR ...............................271, 275 Highlight display .............................. 193 Highlights............................................ 236 Histogram ..................................237, 238 I Image area . 73, 75, 81, 168, 169, 269, 274 Image comment ............................... 291 Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 290 Image overlay ...........................294, 299 Image quality.............................. 77, 268 Image review .................. 176, 230, 267 Image size ...........................81, 169, 269 Incandescent (White balance)..... 111 Index marking ..........................167, 178 In-focus indicator ..................34, 93, 98 Information ...............................185, 234 Information display .........13, 185, 281 Interval timer shooting .........217, 272 ISO sensitivity ....................99, 102, 281 ISO sensitivity settings ..........102, 271 ISO sensitivity step value............... 278 i-TTL....................................................... 149 J JPEG .................................................. 77, 80 JPEG basic.............................................. 77 JPEG compression .....................80, 269 JPEG fine ................................................ 77 JPEG normal.......................................... 77 L L (large) ..........................................81, 169 LAN adapters......................................319 Landscape (Set Picture Control)..130 Language................................... 290, 357 LCD illumination .......................... 5, 281 Lens.......................23, 29, 224, 304, 363 Lens focus ring.........97, 363, 364, 365 Lens mount .......................................3, 98 Lens vibration reduction switch..367 Live view .............................31, 161–170 Live view selector ......................31, 161 Location data ........................... 227, 241 Lock mirror up for cleaning...........324 Long exposure NR ............................271 Lossless compressed (Type)............ 80 M M (medium) ..................................81, 169 Manage Picture Control ...... 135, 270, 275 Manual............................................. 56, 97 Manual focus ........................................ 97 Matrix metering.................................105 Max. continuous release ................280 Maximum aperture .......150, 307, 317 Maximum sensitivity........................103 MB-D15..............................281, 286, 319 Memory buffer..................................... 68 Memory card ....... 22, 27, 82, 379, 380 Memory card capacity.....................380 Metering...............................................105 Microphone ........................................193 387 Microphone sensitivity ......... 192, 273 Miniature effect ...................45, 47, 296 Minimum aperture ......................29, 51 Minimum shutter speed................ 103 Mired .................................................... 116 Mirror.................................... 71, 156, 324 Mirror up .........................................66, 71 Mode dial ................................................. 6 Mode dial lock release......................... 6 Modeling flash ........................... 55, 284 Monitor ...................................12, 39, 229 Monitor brightness........191, 192, 289 Monitor color balance.................... 290 Monitor off delay.............................. 279 Monitor pre-flash .................... 149, 154 Monochrome............................ 130, 294 Mounting mark...............363, 364, 365 Movie ISO sensitivity settings...... 275 Movie live view ................................. 161 Movie quality...................166, 192, 273 Movie shooting menu.................... 273 Movie-record button ............. 163, 286 Movies.................................................. 161 Multiple exposure...................211, 272 MY MENU ............................................ 297 N NEF (RAW)..............................77, 80, 302 NEF (RAW) bit depth ..........................80 NEF (RAW) processing...........295, 302 NEF (RAW) recording ............... 80, 269 Network............................................... 293 Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 130 NFC............................................... 254, 264 Non-CPU lens...................224, 305, 308 Non-CPU lens data........................... 224 Normal-area AF....................................88 Number of focus points................. 277 Number of shots............................... 382 O OK button.....................................17, 284 Optimal quality (JPEG compression) . 80 Optional flash........................... 283, 311 Overflow (Role played by card in Slot 2) .................................................... 82 Overview data....................................242 P Perspective control ..........................296 Photo information............................234 Photo shooting menu.....................268 PictBridge ............................................376 Picture Controls....................... 130, 132 Picture size ..........................................310 Playback........................................39, 229 Playback display options ..... 234, 266 Playback folder ..................................266 Playback information ......................234 Playback menu ..................................266 Playback slot and folder.................233 Playback zoom...................................243 Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........130 Power connector ..............................319 Predictive focus tracking ................. 85 Preset manual (White balance)...111, 120 Press the shutter-release button all the way down .................................... 35 Press the shutter-release button halfway ................................................. 34 Preview button........ 55, 167, 285, 288 Programmed auto.............................. 52 Protecting photographs ................245 Pv button.................... 55, 167, 285, 288 Q Quick retouch ....................................295 388 Quick-response remote (Remote control mode (ML-L3)).................. 156 Quiet shutter-release .........................66 R RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role played by card in Slot 2) ................................82 Rear-curtain sync.............................. 147 RECENT SETTINGS ............................ 297 Red-eye correction .......................... 294 Red-eye reduction ..................145, 147 Release button to use dial............. 285 Release mode .................................. 8, 66 Release mode dial.......................... 8, 66 Release mode dial lock release . 8, 66 Remote control ........................156, 319 Remote control mode (ML-L3) ... 156, 272 Remote cord..........................................58 Remote mirror-up (Remote control mode (ML-L3)) ................................. 156 Remote on duration (ML-L3)........ 279 Removing the lens from the camera 29 Reset ..................................................... 194 Reset custom settings .................... 276 Reset movie shooting menu........ 273 Reset photo shooting menu ........ 268 Reset user settings..............................65 Resize.................................................... 295 Restoring default settings............. 194 Retouch menu..........................233, 294 Reverse indicators............................ 286 RGB ........................................................ 237 Role played by card in Slot 2. 82, 268 Rotate tall............................................ 267 S S (small) ......................................... 81, 169 Save selected frame ...............179, 183 Save user settings ...............................62 Save/load settings ............................291 Scene mode .......................................... 41 SD memory card. 22, 27, 82, 379, 380 Select date................................. 249, 266 Select to send to smart device/ deselect .................................... 233, 263 Selective color......................45, 49, 296 Self-timer ...............................66, 69, 279 Sensitivity .....................................99, 102 Set clock from satellite....................227 Set Picture Control ........130, 270, 275 Setup menu ........................................289 Shade (White balance)....................111 Shooting data ....................................239 Shutter speed................................ 53, 56 Shutter-priority auto.......................... 53 Shutter-release button ....35, 93, 107, 279, 288 Shutter-release button AE-L .........279 Side-by-side comparison ...............296 Single frame.......................................... 66 Single-point AF............................. 86, 90 Single-servo AF............................. 83, 84 Size..................................................81, 169 Size priority (JPEG compression)... 80 Slide show ...........................................267 Slot ...........................................27, 82, 233 Slot empty release lock...................286 Slow sync ................................... 145, 147 Smart device.......................................250 Speaker......................................................4 Special effects ...................................... 44 Speedlight ...........................................311 Spot........................................................105 Spot white balance ..........................124 SSID........................................................251 Standard (Set Picture Control) .....130 Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR.............................................. 149, 313 Standby timer ................... 37, 227, 279 Storage folder ....................................268 389 Store points by orientation .......... 277 Straighten ........................................... 295 Subject-tracking AF............................89 T Thumbnail playback ....................... 231 Time ..................................24, 58, 60, 290 Time zone and date.................. 24, 290 Time-lapse photography......171, 275 Timer.............................................. 69, 217 Toning......................................... 133, 135 Trim .............................................. 294, 298 Trimming movies ............................. 179 Tripod........................................................ 3 Two-button reset ............................. 194 Type D lens................................304, 307 Type E lens................................. 304, 307 Type G lens ................................304, 307 U User settings .........................................62 UT-1....................................................... 319 UTC............................................... 228, 241 V Vibration reduction ......................... 367 View SSID ............................................ 251 Viewfinder ................... 10, 25, 319, 349 Viewfinder eyepiece ..........................70 Viewfinder eyepiece cap ..................70 Viewfinder focus........................ 25, 319 Viewfinder grid display .................. 280 ViewNX-i....................................................ii Vignette control ............................... 271 Virtual horizon......................13, 14, 291 Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 130 Volume................................................. 178 W WB (White balance)................ 111, 202 390 WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set) 202 White balance ........111, 202, 269, 274 Wide-area AF........................................ 88 Wi-Fi.......................................................250 Wind noise reduction............ 192, 274 Wireless Mobile Utility .......... 250, 251 Wireless network .................... 250, 319 Wireless remote controller. 160, 287, 319 Wireless transmitter.........................319 WT-5 ......................................................319 pQ1230UM_NT(En)01_cover.fm Page 1 Monday, February 16, 2015 12:05 PM No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION. DIGITAL CAMERA User's Manual Printed in Thailand En_02 SB5B02(11) En 6MB27011-02 Nikon Manual Viewer 2 Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere. Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store and Google Play. En
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project